JP7325146B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a characteristic informing means is provided. A game machine includes a plurality of reels, a stop operation means, and a notification means, and the notification means may execute a first operation instruction notification and a second operation instruction notification, The first operation instruction notification is notification that includes a suggestion of a first symbol aiming to stop and does not include a suggestion of a second symbol, and the second operation instruction alert is notification that the The notification includes the suggestion of the second pattern targeting the above and does not include the suggestion of the first pattern. Further, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification, the first symbol can be stopped in a first stop mode in which the first symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels, and the first operation instruction notification is executed. In the game to be stopped in the second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels, and in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, in the first stop mode It is stopable, and in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, the game can be stopped in the second stop mode. [Selection drawing] Fig. 168

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one of game machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with various notification means (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2005-296354 A

However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in the notification means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic informing means.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a plurality of reels, stop operation means, and notification means, wherein the notification means is means that may execute a first operation instruction notification. wherein the first operation instruction notification is notification including a suggestion of a first pattern that aims to stop, and the first operation instruction notification is a notification that does not include a suggestion of a second pattern In a game ( hereinafter referred to as "first game") in which a predetermined winning combination is won and the first operation instruction notification is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first game") , the first symbols stop on all of the plurality of reels. It is possible to stop in one stop mode, and in the first game , it is possible to stop in a second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels, and the notification means is a second stop mode. means for executing two operational instruction notifications, wherein the second operational instruction notification is a notification including a suggestion of the second symbol aiming to stop, and the second operational instruction The notification is notification that does not include the suggestion of the first symbol, and in a game (hereinafter referred to as "second game") in which a predetermined winning combination is won and the second operation instruction notification is executed (hereinafter referred to as "second game") , The gaming machine is characterized in that it can be stopped in the first stop mode, and in the second game , it can be stopped in the second stop mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic informing means.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. 4 is a transition diagram of a game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. It is the figure which showed the notification example at the time of performing the 1st operation instruction notification in a certain game in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of alerting|reporting at the time of performing 2nd operation instruction alerting|reporting in a certain game in time series. (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the setting key is turned from off to on while the power is off. (b) It is the front view which showed the example which performed 1st information in the 1st state. (c) It is the front view which showed the example which performed 2nd alert|reporting in a 2nd state. (a) It is the figure which showed the example 1 of setting change operation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the example 2 of setting change operation in time series. (a) It is the figure which showed the example 3 of setting change operation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the example 4 of setting change operation in time series. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 19 viewed obliquely from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 25. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment, (b) is a side view schematically showing the visual range of a person H1 in a standing posture, and (c) is a sitting posture. 2 is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each substrate and each unit shown in FIG. 25; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between a reel motor drive IC 322i and a 24V power supply line; 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector 170; FIG. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing the difference in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are It is a figure which shows an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a flow of a main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 39; FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 41; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is the first sub-controller. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is the second sub-controller. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting to setting b by setting change and the state of related components; FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 45; (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed while the setting value is set to setting b; FIG. 10 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the checkout operation is performed immediately after the third stop while the third stop is being performed; FIG. 48A and 48B are diagrams schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage of FIG. 47; (a) is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting is checked in the state where the setting is set to setting 1, which is the default setting value, and (b) is the state set to setting 1. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in power saving mode in . FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage of FIG. 49; (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state set in setting b, and (b) is a table set in power saving mode in the state set in setting b It is the table|surface which summarized the state of the component concerned when confirmation is performed. FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage of FIG. 51; (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the hands that are the targets of the lottery of hands and the level of the winning probability in RT1. FIG. 10C is a diagram for explaining part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery and the level of winning probability in RT2. It is a diagram showing an example of payout rates of RT1 and RT2. It is the table|surface which put together the state of the component related when the 1st sound is output by the closure of the front door 102 after setting change. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. . When the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, power failure and power recovery occurs during rotation of the reel, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after power recovery. It is the table|surface which summarized the state. It is a table summarizing the states of related constituent elements when the front door 102 is closed during payout after settlement of the inserted tokens before the front door 102 is closed after the setting change. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the setting, the state of the related components when the power failure and power recovery occurs during payout after settlement of the inserted medals, and the front door 102 is closed during payout after power recovery. This is a summary table. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting change. It is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second game state after setting change. After confirming the setting once, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. be. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting is confirmed once, and the game is played once. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components when a set value is displayed on a set value display 293 even when a setting key switch 281 is in an off state. After confirming the setting once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are accounted for. is a table summarizing the states of After confirming the setting once, the state of the related constituent elements when the setting key switch 281 is turned on after the tokens are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state and the game is played is summarized. It is a table. It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 and a lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. 71 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 109 similarly shown in FIG. 70; FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68. FIG. It is a table summarizing gaming machine state information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700; (a) is a diagram showing details of hall control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. FIG. 10 is a table showing medal count control state commands; FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process. FIG. 83 is a flow chart of medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing (step S102) in FIG. 82; FIG. 84 is a flow chart of processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG. 83; FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG. 84; FIG. 90 is a flow chart of variation information transmission processing (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 84, 85 and 89; FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 86; FIG. 88 is a flow chart of priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) to the medal count control unit in FIGS. 83 and 87; FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart of a medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of game control part timer interruption processing. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG. 90; FIG. 91 is a flow chart of a medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 90; It is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process; FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality determination processing (step S302) in FIG. 94; FIG. 4 is a table showing a target range of RAM clear processing; FIG. 96 is a flowchart of error request setting processing (step S3022) in FIG. 95 and the like; FIG. 95 is a flowchart of preparation processing (step S303) in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 94; FIG. 99. It is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of count notification transmission processing (step S305) in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a flow chart of rental notification reception confirmation processing (step S306) in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a flowchart of lending reception result response transmission processing (step S308) in FIG. 94; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of a medal count control unit; FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart of a lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 104; FIG. 106 is a flow chart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105. FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart of an update process (step S405) to be counted in FIG. 104; FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. It is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in FIG. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 111; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in FIG. 111; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of start lever acceptance command reception processing (step S4521) in FIG. 111; FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of game information setting processing (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 114 and 116; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of payout command reception processing (step S4523) in FIG. 111; FIG. 117 is a flowchart of game medal number overflow confirmation processing (step S4A11) in FIG. 116; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of an error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 111; FIG. 105 is a flowchart of error monitoring processing (step S407) in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a medal number control command transmission process (step S408) addressed to the game control unit in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 104; FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing a modification of the processing during medal insertion in FIG. 84; FIG. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87; FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 112; FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 107; FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 107; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first example in which a count button 171 is operated; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example in which a betting operation is performed before the counting button 171 is operated and the number of bets is not 0. FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect. 4 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated; FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. 134(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and FIG. 134(b) is a state in which 30 sheets are set as the number to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 134(c). 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off at , and then the power is restored. FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing an example in which the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 126 is employed; (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs and the power is restored; It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long-press operation, has elapsed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started. FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140; 141 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140; (a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect image display device 157 displays the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in addition to the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 145; 146 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed after exceeding the second payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of notification of approaching the upper limit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a notification prompting counting is superimposed on an error notification with high urgency; (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the count continues even after transition to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number; 10 is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number; FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player. 153(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 153(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has once been forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) is an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, normal state). 7 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the number of game medals when the count button 171 is long-pressed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of acquisition medals in AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when overflow of a game medal|token occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a game medal number upper limit exceeded error and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a sound output permission period is provided in outputting a counting sound for a counting process; 165(a) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a). FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b). FIG. It is the figure which showed the notification example at the time of performing the 1st operation instruction notification in a certain game in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of alerting|reporting at the time of performing 2nd operation instruction alerting|reporting in a certain game in time series. It is the figure which showed the example which continues a 1st alert|reporting in time series. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when a first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game and the game is stopped in a first stop mode in a different stop order from operation navigation.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined amount of game value (medals, electronic medals, etc.) is inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receives a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Then, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. When the reels are accepted, the rotation is individually stopped, and if the condition determined by the pattern combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game value is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out game values if they do not match.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door (door) 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. And prepare.

In this example, by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detecting means, hereinafter also referred to as an "open/close sensor", not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass through the space.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is in the open state. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, and may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, and the like. Moreover, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door is opened and closed. Alternatively, even if the door is closed, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state by performing a predetermined operation even if the front door 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly changed to the closed detection state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as the "door simulating state"). may be referred to as “closed”).

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor in the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 2, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the drawing) are displayed on the left reel upper row symbols and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the drawing). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed on the upper stage. The symbol is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 lower stage (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively, and the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed on the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, none of the winning lines are activated. validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines. Incidentally, the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5 and 8 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as an active line area S1. Also, the area other than the effective line area S1 of the pattern display window 113 (the area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as the non-effective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1 and a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state or special game to be described later. It is a lamp that informs the player of the status. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit is three). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for production and is also called production button 190 . The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ).

It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key (first operation means) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. This setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm settings of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later. Further, inside the body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as a “reset SW”) is provided that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing the switch. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting keys and reset switch are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door) is in the open state, and cannot be operated when the front door 102 (door) is in the closed state. Difficult or impossible. In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 14) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although details will be described later, when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any one of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Also, on the inner wall of the main body 101, an external common terminal board (not shown) is attached which is connected to the main control board constituting the main control section 300 and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board has an external cable connection section for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 3) provided in a hall computer (not shown) or the like, and an external centralized terminal board LED (not shown) is provided. An external cable is inserted into the main body 101 through a cable hole opened on the rear surface of the main body 101 and connected to the external cable connecting portion of the external centralized terminal plate.

A medal dispensing device (not shown; a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the inner wall of the main body 101, and an auxiliary medal storage (not shown) is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device. Behind this is an overflow terminal (not shown).

A power supply box (not shown) having a power board is arranged on the left side of the token payout device, and a power switch (not shown) is arranged in front of the power supply box. The power supply box converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later, and each device. . In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. , start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical sensors for reels 110-112 (index sensor 80), etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. to detect The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110 to 112 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes, L become a level. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like through the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output, and the external centralized terminal board LED is lit when the game information is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling lighting patterns of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "bell symbol", the frame numbered 2 on the middle reel 111 has a "seven 1 symbol", and the frame numbered 2 on the right reel 112 has a "seven symbol". 1B pattern” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination 1, a replay combination, and minor combinations 1-8. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special role 1 and replaying role may be called "operating role". In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of the replay role is included. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning. be.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 3-seven 1-replay" for special role 1. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "RB1" or "RB".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if the special role 1 is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the same state as the special role 1 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are all won. becomes easier.

The special role internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internally elected state, if a role other than the special role is internally elected, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , reel stop control is executed.

The replaying combination is a winning combination (operating combination) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

The replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a replay is won, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 8 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small combination 1, "replay-cherry-replay" for small combination 2, and "cherry-cherry-cherry" for small combination 3. 4 is "Bell B-Bell-Bell", small combination 5 is "Bell B-Bell (or Bell B)-Bell", small combination 6 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", The small combination 7 is "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2", and the small combination 8 is "seven 3-seven 3-seven 3". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "weak cherry", the small role 3 is "strong cherry", the small role 4 is "common bell", and the small role 5 is "push order bell". , Small roles 6 to 8 may be referred to as "one-piece role".

<Types of game status (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a replay low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree is changed to improve the amusement of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the replay low probability state, the special role internal winning state, and the special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 6 shows each of the RTs described above, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and completion of a specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal winning probability of a replay role than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

There are a special winning combination 1, a replay winning combination, and small winning combinations 1 to 8 in RT0. If the winning combination is not won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 6 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state, which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. Also, the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0, and RT is more advantageous than RT0.

In RT1, the internal winning combination includes replay combinations and small winning combinations 1-8.

FIG. 6 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process proceeds to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 has a higher probability of winning a common bell (minor combination 4) than other RTs, and is an advantageous RT that facilitates the acquisition of medals.

The internal winning combination in RT2 is only the common bell (small combination 4). FIG. 5 shows that in RT2, when the game is played a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example), or when a predetermined number of times (5 times in this example) is won, the process proceeds to RT0. ing.

The conditions for ending RT2 are not particularly limited. For example, the game may end when a predetermined number of coins or more are paid out, or when a predetermined winning combination is won.

<Unadvantageous Sections and Advantageous Sections>
In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, apart from the above-described RT, the game state is divided into non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals for management. Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation navigation" or "operation instruction notification") is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is displayed. not. In addition, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions in the advantageous section, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally elected. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 .

In this embodiment, the initial state (for example, the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to the non-advantageous section. Also, when there is a RAM clear (setting change), this non-advantageous interval is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as normal state A. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of advantageous section states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state (including super AT state). FIG. 7 shows transitions between four states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In this embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF for non-advantageous sections, and the advantageous section flag is set to ON for advantageous sections. distinguish. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit, when the advantageous section continues over a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

It should be noted that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or, for example, a premonitory state before shifting to the AT state may be further provided, and is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the states of the non-advantageous sections.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there are cases where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won, and the operation navigation is not displayed, so for RT2, a non-advantageous section may be set once, and after RT2 is completed, it may return to the advantageous section. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and it may be configured such that an internal winning is made to the pressing order bell at RT2 and an operation navigation is displayed.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination. If the lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are satisfied. Further, when the transition condition is established, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a lottery for transition to each game chance state in the normal state B, and when this lottery is won , conditions to be established when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance status>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be conducted when a specific combination (in this example, one-card combination (minor combination 6 to 8)) is internally won. When the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games has passed, the game shifts to the normal state B, and when the number of AT sets is 0, the game shifts to the AT state. When shifting to the AT state, the AT set number is decremented by 1, and the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state. The AT lottery timing and execution conditions can be arbitrarily adopted.

In addition, when the AT lottery is won, there is a case where a notification (operation instruction notification) including a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped is executed (details will be described later). Note that the operation instruction notification is not limited to a notification including a suggestion of a symbol that is intended to be stopped, and for example, a notification including a pressing order (for example, "middle → right → left", "press middle", etc.). may be

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Below, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the pressing order bell (small winning combination 5) is internally won, an operation navigation indicating the corresponding correct pressing order is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the pressing order and timing. may indicate both. In addition, on the payout number indicator 127, the 7 segments are lit up in a manner corresponding to the pressing order of the correct answer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number indicator 127 may also be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to both the pressing order and the timing. .

In this embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. Then, when the AT remaining game number becomes 0, if the AT set number is greater than 0, the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined value (for example, 50), and if the AT set number is 0, the chance state is entered. conduct a lottery. When the lottery is won, the state shifts to the chance state, and when the lottery is not won, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). Incidentally, when the special game state (RT2) is entered in the middle of the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT0 is reached. Note that the number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed at the time of internal lottery in this embodiment).

The AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the AT set number or the AT remaining game number.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or bet buttons 130 and 132 have been operated), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (three) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on. Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when a replay is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating that the replay is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is executed. If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning role), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating a loss to the first sub-control section 400 . The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination, information on the current advantageous section (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and AT lottery. And information that can specify the result of the AT addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command including the internal winning of the push order bell (small win 5) also includes operation instruction information indicating the correct operation order of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. included.

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S113, reel rotation start processing is executed on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in timer update processing, which will be described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small combination 1 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S119, if the player wins any winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the given number.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 7 is updated. For example, when the normal state A shifts to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when the AT state shifts to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set OFF. In addition, preparations are made for transmission of the game state update command. This command includes information on RT, information on non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals (for example, advantageous interval flag, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to interrupt statuses (acquiring various interrupt statuses based on signals from various sensors 318) are executed. For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Reception command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying the effect lottery process, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying the acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, reel Consists of 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) It is

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 10(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 10(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 10A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 11A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>>
Next, a gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. Note that terms and phrases that overlap with other embodiments are given priority over the terms and phrases of this embodiment, and with respect to descriptions that overlap drawings other than FIGS. 12 and 13, descriptions in FIGS.

<Notification means>
Next, before describing various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. The display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display device 127, the accumulated number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., which have been described with reference to FIG. These display means are composed of liquid crystal display devices, LEDs, segment displays and the like in this example.

<Notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

<Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. Light-emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the side lamp 144, the title panel (lamp) 162, the effect button 190, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the start lever 135, and the upper lamp 142 ( 14), reel backlights (not shown) of the reels 110 to 112, and the like, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Notification of stop instruction>
Next, the stop instruction notification will be described. Here, the stop instruction notification is a notification (for example, operation navigation) including a suggestion of a symbol aimed at stopping, and the notification means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment aims at stopping There are cases where the first operation instruction notification including the suggestion of the first symbol to be and the second operation instruction notification including the suggestion of the second symbol aiming to stop are executed.

<Notification of first stop instruction>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. The state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135, and the first operation instruction is given in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with the winning of the AT lottery in the chance state. Notification ID1 is being executed.

The first operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol to be stopped. In this example, as the first operation instruction notification ID1, a Seven 1 symbol ( Target symbol notification ID 1a (in this example, includes an image of Seven 1 symbol and a character string "Aim!") display), and a pressing order notification ID 1b suggesting the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (in this example, a display suggesting that the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137). ) is running.

In addition, the first operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be a notification including a notification including a suggestion of the first symbol to be stopped. For example, pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 The notification may be a notification that does not include the pushing order notification ID 1b that suggests the order, or may be a notification composed only of a character string such as "Aim for the blue 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means ( Alternatively), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of voice saying "Aim for blue 7") may be applied.

Also, the conditions for executing the first operation instruction notification are not limited to this example. For example, 100 points may be accumulated.

<First stop instruction notification→first stop mode→execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” symbol combination), the first notification is executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1 and aims at the Seven 1 symbol. Then, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 are in the pattern combination of "seven 1 - seven 1 - seven 1" (first stop mode). Since the symbol combination (first stop mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" has been completed on the winning line L1), the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, Seven A display including an image of one pattern, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 12(d), it shifts to AT state and starts AT game.

In this example, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first symbol can be stopped. Other symbol combinations including the first symbol targeting .

In addition, the first notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of a character string such as "Congratulations Blue 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means (or instead ), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of sound "Congratulations Blue 7"), and notification by light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red) may apply.

Further, the execution timing of the first notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode. In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<First stop instruction notification → second stop mode → non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3” symbol combination), the first notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-4), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, Aiming at the symbols, the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 are the symbol combination of "seven 3 - seven 3 - seven 3" (second stop 12 (b-1) because the symbol combination of "seven-three-seven-three-seven-three" (second stop mode) is complete on the winning line L1). RD1 (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 1 pattern, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)), the reel is in the first stop mode (in this example, " Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination), at least while executing the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12 (b-1)) in the game , when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first notification in the game is not executed, information can be given without misleading the player, the player is not misunderstood, and the decline in the player's desire to play can be prevented.

In addition, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which all the reels have the second symbol (this In the example, since the Seven 3 symbol) is stopped, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be misunderstood.

In this example, the second stop mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, seven 3 symbols) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second symbol can be stopped. It may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol targeting .

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<First stop instruction notification→fourth stop mode→non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reel is in a fourth stop mode (first stop mode, the second stop mode, and the third stop mode (so-called breakout)), the first notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-2), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1 and aims at the Seven 1 symbol. Then, the stop operation was performed in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137. ), and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) was displayed on the winning line L1. 12 (b-1), the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 1 pattern, the character string "Get!", display including effect images) is not running.

According to this example, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. Stopping in a fourth stopping mode (in this example, a stopping mode other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose stitches)), at least Since the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made so as not to mislead the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of the player's willingness to play without misunderstanding.

In this example, the fourth stop mode is defined as a mode in which all the reels are stopped without a specific pattern (in this example, one of Seven 1 pattern, Seven 2 pattern, and Seven 3 pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a mode in which other specific symbols are not aligned and stopped.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<First stop instruction notification→third stop mode→execution of third notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the third stop mode (in this example, "seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2” symbol combination), the third notification is executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-3), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, Aiming at the symbols, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 are combined with the symbol “seven 2-seven 2-seven 2” (the third stop). mode) (the pattern combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stop mode) is completed on the winning line L1), so that the third notification RD3 (third notification. This example) , the display including the Seven 2 pattern image, the character string "Get!", and the effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"). In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 12(d), it shifts to AT state and starts AT game.

According to this example, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. In the example, when the Seven 2 symbol) is stopped in the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), at least the third notification ( In this example, since the third notification RD3) shown in FIG. 12(b-3) is executed, it can be made to think that the reels have stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed, The player's interest can be heightened.

In this example, the third stop mode is a mode in which the third symbols (in this example, seven 2 symbols) are stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stop mode is a mode in which all the reels are stopped. It may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol targeting .

Further, the third notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of a character string such as "Congratulations on Red 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means (or instead ), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (e.g., output of sound "Congratulations on Red 7"), and notification by light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 (e.g., flashing yellow). may apply.

Further, the execution timing of the third notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the third stop mode. In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Temporary stop of the first stop mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), the reel effect is executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed. FIG. 4(c-1) shows that the reel effect is executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed. is in a state of

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, after the reels have stopped in the second stop mode (or after the reels have stopped in the fourth stop mode), the reel effect is the first stop mode (in this example, " It is configured to stop at a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1").

In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), as shown in FIG. 12(a), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a certain game, as shown in FIG. The reels 110 to 112 are not in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), but the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (the second stop mode), the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. and stop (temporarily stop) in the first stop mode (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as the reel effect, and after executing the first notification RD1 , the AT game is started.

According to this example, after stopping the reels in the second stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, so that the player can be surprised. can.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 12(c-1), as shown in FIG. 12(a), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a game, In addition, the reels 110 to 112 are not in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), but the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode), the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. and stop (temporarily stop) in the first stop mode (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as the reel effect, and after executing the first notification RD1 , the AT game is started.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode after being stopped in the fourth stop mode, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, so that the player can be surprised. can.

<Second stop instruction notification>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the second operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135, and the second operation is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with the winning of the super AT lottery in the chance state. Instruction notification ID2 is being executed.

The second operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of a second symbol to be stopped. In this example, as the second operation instruction notification ID2, seven 3 symbols ( Target symbol notification ID 2a (in this example, includes an image of Seven 3 symbols and a character string "Aim!") display), and a pressing order notification ID 2b suggesting the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (in this example, a display suggesting that the stop operation should be performed in the order of middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137). ) is running.

In addition, the second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be a notification including a notification including a suggestion of a second symbol aimed at stopping, for example, pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 The notification may be a notification that does not include the push order notification ID 2b that suggests the order, or may be a notification composed only of a character string such as "Aim for gold 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means ( Alternatively), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of voice saying "Aim for gold 7") may be applied.

Also, the execution condition of the second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example. For example, 100 points may be accumulated.

<Second stop instruction notification → second stop mode → execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3” symbol combination), the second notification is executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-4), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2 and aims at the Seven 3 symbol. Then, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 are in the pattern combination of "seven 3 - seven 3 - seven 3" (second stop mode). Since the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stop mode) has been completed on the winning line L1, the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, Seven A display including an image of 3 symbols, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed when the super AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the second stop mode (in this example, "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"). In the next game after stopping at symbol combination), as shown in FIG. 13(d), the game shifts to a super AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the AT state, and the super AT game is started.

As described above, in the next game after stopping in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), the state shifts to the AT state, whereas the second (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), in the next game, the game will shift to a super AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the AT state. Rather than the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") ) is more valuable as a symbol combination.

Also, in the next game after stopping in the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), since it shifts to the AT state, the first stop mode ( In this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") and the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") are the symbol combinations have the same value.

In this example, the second stop mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, seven 3 symbols) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second symbol can be stopped. It may be another symbol combination, including a second symbol targeting .

In addition, the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of a character string such as "Congratulations on Friday 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means (or instead ), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of sound "Congratulations on Friday 7"), and notification by light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red) may apply.

Further, the execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, or the In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Second stop instruction notification → first stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” symbol combination), the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, Aiming at the symbols, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 are combined with the symbol “seven 1-seven 1-seven 1” (the first stop mode) (the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) is completed on the winning line L1), so the second notification shown in FIG. 13 (b-4) RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 3 symbols, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, the reel is in the second stop mode (in this example, " Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination), at least in the game second notification (in this example, second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 12 (b-4)) While executing , when the reels are stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, at least the second notification is performed in the game is not executed, information can be given without misleading the player, the player is not misunderstood, and the decline in the player's desire to play can be prevented.

In addition, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which all the reels have the second symbol (this In the example, since the Seven 3 symbol) is stopped, the symbol suggested by the second operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be misunderstood.

In this example, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first symbol can be stopped. It may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol targeting .

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<Second stop instruction notification→fourth stop mode→non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the fourth stop mode (in this example, the first stop mode, the second stop mode, and the third stop mode (so-called breakout)), the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-2), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2 and aims at the Seven 3 symbol. , the stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137 (or the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2 and stops the stop buttons 137 to 139). ), and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) was displayed on the winning line L1. 13 (b-4), the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 3 pattern, the character string "Get!", display including effect images) is not running.

According to this example, in the game for executing the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. Stopping in a fourth stopping mode (in this example, a stopping mode other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose stitches)), at least Since the second notification (the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4) in this example) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made so as not to mislead the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of the player's willingness to play without misunderstanding.

In this example, the fourth stop mode is defined as a mode in which all the reels are stopped without a specific pattern (in this example, one of Seven 1 pattern, Seven 2 pattern, and Seven 3 pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a mode in which other specific symbols are not aligned and stopped.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<Second stop instruction notification → third stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the third stop mode (in this example, "seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2” symbol combination), the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-3), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, Aiming at the symbols, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 are combined with the symbol “seven 2-seven 2-seven 2” (the third stop). mode) (the pattern combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stop mode) is completed on the winning line L1), so the second notification shown in FIG. 13 (b-4) RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 3 symbols, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game for executing the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. When stopped in the third stop mode (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), at least in the game, the second notification (in this example, FIG. 13 ( Since the second notification RD2) shown in b-4) is not executed, the notification can be made so as not to mislead the player, and the player will not be misunderstood, and the player's willingness to play will not decrease. It can be prevented before it happens.

In this example, the third stop mode is a mode in which the third symbols (in this example, seven 2 symbols) are stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stop mode is a mode in which all the reels are stopped. It may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol targeting .

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the third stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<Temporary stop of the second stop mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 13(c), the reels 110 to 112 are in a stop mode other than the second stop mode (first, third, and fourth stop modes in this example) in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed. In the next game after stopping in any mode), the reel effect is being executed.

After the reel stops in a stop mode other than the second stop mode, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment uses the second stop mode (in this example, "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" as a reel effect). combination).

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), after executing the second operation instruction notification ID2 in a certain game, as shown in FIG. If it stops at the pattern combination of "seven 1 - seven 1 - seven 1" (first stop mode) instead of the pattern combination of "seven 3 - seven 3 - seven 3" in this example, Although the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed, as shown in FIG. After starting and stopping (temporarily stopping) in the second stop mode (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") as the reel effect, and executing the second notification RD2, Start a super AT game.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode after being stopped in the stop mode other than the second stop mode, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode in a certain game, the second notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, which surprises the player. can give

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and stop operation means (for example, shown in FIG. stop buttons 137 to 139) and notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps). Means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)), and the first operation instruction notification aims to stop The notification includes the suggestion of the first symbol (for example, the Seven 1 symbol), the first operation instruction notification is the notification that does not include the suggestion of the third symbol, and the first operation instruction notification is executed. In the game, the reels can be stopped in a first stop mode (for example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" shown in FIG. 12 (b-1)), and the first operation instruction In a game that executes notification, the reels can be stopped in a third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" shown in FIG. 12 (b-3)), and the notification means is, when the reel stops in the first stop mode in a game that executes the first operation instruction notification, at least the first notification in the game (for example, the first notification shown in FIG. 12 (b-1) means for executing notification RD1), wherein when the reel stops in the third stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the notification means performs at least the first notification in the game. When the reel stops in the third stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the notification means performs at least a third notification in the game (for example, FIG. 12 ( means for executing the third notification RD3) shown in b-3), the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbols are stopped on all the reels, and the third stop mode is a mode in which the third symbols are stopped on all the reels, the first notification is a notification regarding the first symbol, and the third notification is a notification regarding the third symbol A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the game that executes the first operation instruction notification, at least the first notification is executed in the game, while the first When the reels are stopped in the third stop mode in the game in which the operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first notification is not executed in the game, so that the notification can be given so as not to mislead the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of the player's willingness to play without misunderstanding.

In addition, the notification means is a means that does not execute the first notification at least in the game when the reel stops in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, and the second The stop mode is a mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all the reels, and after the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels are stopped in the first stop mode as a reel effect in the next game. can be anything.

Further, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which all the reels have the second symbol ( For example, it may be a mode in which the Seven 3 pattern) has stopped.

With such a configuration, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be misunderstood.

Further, the informing means, when the reels are stopped in a third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2") in a game in which the first operation instruction informing is executed, at least the It is a means for executing the third notification (for example, the third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12 (b-3)) in the game, and the third stop mode is a third symbol on all reels (for example, Seven 2 symbols) may be stopped.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the reels are stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Further, the notifying means may be configured such that the reel is in a fourth stop mode (for example, a stop other than the first stop mode, the second stop mode, and the third stop mode) in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification. mode (so-called loose eye)) is a means for not executing the first notification at least in the game, and the fourth stop mode is a specific symbol (for example, Seven 1 symbol) on all reels , Seven 2 symbols, or Seven 3 symbols) may be stopped without being aligned.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player so as not to mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding, and prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

Further, after the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reel performance may be stopped in the first stop mode.

With such a configuration, after the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, the notification means is a means that may execute a second operation instruction notification (for example, a second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), and the second operation instruction notification includes: The notification includes a suggestion of the second symbol aimed to be stopped, and the notification means causes the reel to stop in the second stop mode (for example, " symbol combination of Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), at least in the game the second notification (for example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13 (b-4)) is a means for executing, The informing means, when the reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the second operation instruction informing is executed, at least the game may be means for not executing the second notification in.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player so as not to mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding, and prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

In addition, the first operation instruction notification and the second operation instruction notification are not limited to the notification including the suggestion of the pattern that is targeted to be stopped. "Right→Left", "Center!!", "Press center", etc.) may be included.

In addition, the third stop mode or the fourth stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, Seven 1 symbol) and the second symbol (for example, Seven 3 symbol) are not stopped on all the reels. may be

Further, all, a plurality of, or one of the first stop mode, the second stop mode, the third stop mode, and the fourth stop mode may be specified by specific letters, numerals, Alternatively, it may be configured including a figure (eg, number 7).

With such a configuration, since the stop modes are similar, it may be possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, a lottery means capable of internal lottery is provided, and in a game in which the first combination (for example, one-piece combination (small combination 6)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, in FIG. 12(a) When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed according to the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown (or only when), the reel is in the first stop mode (for example, "Seven 1-Seven 1- It may be configured so that it can be stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 1").

In addition, in the game in which the second winning combination (for example, one-piece winning combination (small winning combination 8)) is won, according to the second operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) When (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, the pattern combination of "seven 3 - seven 3 - seven 3"). can be configured to

Also, in the game in which the third winning combination (for example, one-piece winning combination (small winning combination 7)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed without complying (or only when), the reel is in the third stop mode (for example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") It may be configured so that it can be stopped at

<<Embodiment D>>
Next, a gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment D will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. Note that terms and phrases that overlap with other embodiments are given priority over the terms and phrases of this embodiment, and with regard to descriptions that overlap drawings other than FIGS. 14 to 16, descriptions in FIGS.

<Notification means>
Next, before describing various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the setting key is changed from off to on while the power is off.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. Display means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 shown in FIG. , the stored number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., and these display means are composed of a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display device, and the like in this example.

<Notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 14(a).

<Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. Light-emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the title panel (lamp) 162 shown in FIG. .

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, before describing various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be described.

The amusement machine according to the present embodiment opens the front door 102 (door body), and the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101. (or when the setting key is turned on before the specified time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off state of the setting key)) It is possible to shift to a changeable (setting change) state (setting change mode).

Here, the setting change refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) on the setting value display device 101a, the operation means ( Each time a pressing operation of the setting switch) is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, the set value returns to 1 repeatedly. It is possible to change the setting value with .

Further, in the setting change mode, when a pressing operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation by the setting key is released (in this example, the ON When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn off from is performed), the state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state in which normal games are possible. Note that "cancelling a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to turn a setting key off from on" and then "to remove a setting key", but may be "an operation to turn a setting key off". good too.

It should be noted that when the operating means (setting switch) is not pressed and the operating means (start lever 135) is operated, or when the operating means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the setting value is reduced by one cycle (for example, , setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → .

In the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, after the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on, a certain operation (turning on from off) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101. When it is detected, it is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which confirmation of setting values (setting confirmation) is possible.

Here, the setting confirmation refers to confirming the setting value of the game machine, and in this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the initially set setting value (for example, setting 1), or By displaying the setting value (one of setting 1 to setting 6) set by the setting change on the setting value display device 101a, it is possible to confirm the setting value.

Also, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn it off from on) and the front door 102 is closed, the set value is changed. The confirmable state (setting confirmation mode) is terminated, and the normal game state is shifted to a normal game state. Note that "cancelling a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to turn a setting key off from on" and then "to remove a setting key", but may be "an operation to turn a setting key off". good too.

In the specification of the present application, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as the setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a setting change mode in which only setting changes are possible, a setting confirmation mode in which only setting confirmation is possible, and a setting change and setting confirmation mode are included.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG.

<Various Notifications/First State, First Notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment issues the first notification in the first state in which the operation related to the setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch and the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the first state is a state in which the detection means (open/close sensor in this example) detects the open state of the door (front door 102 in this example).

FIG.14(b) is the front view which showed the example which performed 1st alert|reporting in a 1st state.

In this example, the power is turned on after a certain operation (turning on from off) is performed using the setting key, and the state changes to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode). (In this example, the operation of the setting switch and the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is open, and the open/close sensor detects the front door 102 The open state is detected), and the first notification is performed in the first state.

The notification mode of the first notification is not particularly limited. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. , the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white, thereby executing the first light emission notification IF1c.

In addition, since the setting value display device 101a has shifted to a state in which the setting can be changed, a numerical value (1 in this example) indicating the current setting value (setting 1 in this example) is displayed.

In addition, the notification mode of the first notification is not limited to this example, and one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emitting means (lamp), The notification may be made by a plurality of or all of them, and in addition (or in place of) the notification by the movable body may be performed.

In addition, the first notification is not limited to a notification suggesting that the setting is being changed, for example, a display suggesting that an operation related to the setting change is possible (e.g., "You can change the setting or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is valid").

<Various Notifications/Second State, Second Notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment issues the second notification in the second state in which the operation related to the setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch and the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the second state is a state in which the detection means (open/close sensor in this example) detects the closed state of the door (front door 102 in this example).

FIG.14(c) is the front view which showed the example which performed 2nd alerting|reporting in a 2nd state.

In this example, after a certain operation (turning on from off) by the setting key is performed, the power is turned on from off, and after shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (setting change mode), the front door 102 is closed, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. , the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and the second notification is executed in the second state.

The notification mode of the second notification is not particularly limited, but in the second notification IF2 of this example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the message "Please change the settings while the door is open with the door key" is displayed. By performing a display including a character string, the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and from the speakers 272 and 277, a voice saying "Please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is output. By executing the second voice notification IF2b, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit up to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white, the second emission notification IF2c running

In addition, since the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2 after transitioning to a state in which the setting change is possible, the setting value display device 101a displays the current setting value (in this example, setting 2). (In this example, 2) is displayed.

According to this example, the notification means is in the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor has detected that the front door 102 state), the first notification is executed, and the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed) in which the operation related to the setting change can be accepted, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102 Since the second notification different from the first notification is executed in the detected state), the store clerk can grasp the state of the game machine when the setting is changed based on the notification mode by the notification means. and can execute configuration changes appropriately.

The first state is a state in which the detection means (open/close sensor in this example) detects the open state of the door (front door 102 in this example). This is a state in which the closed state is detected, and since the notification differs depending on the open/closed state of the door, the store clerk can appropriately change the setting. In addition, since the notification is made different depending on whether the door is open or closed during the operation of the amusement arcade, the clerk of the amusement arcade may notice the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person.

The second state is not limited to the state in which the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, but the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the front door 102. may be in a state in which the closed state of is detected.

According to this example, in the second state (in this example, the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the door (front door 102 in this example) is closed, and the door is open, and even if the door is artificially closed by a fraudulent person during the operation of the game store, the second notification is made, so the store clerk notices the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person. Sometimes.

In addition, the notification mode of the second notification is not limited to this example, and one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emitting means (lamp), The notification may be made by a plurality of or all of them, and in addition (or in place of) the notification by the movable body may be performed.

In addition, the second notification is not limited to a notification that calls attention to a setting change. For example, a display indicating that an operation related to a setting change is impossible It may be a display including a character string, or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification prompting an operation that enables setting changes (for example, "Please close the door"). may be a display including a character string such as

<Setting change operation>
Next, a specific example of the setting change operation will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

Here, to explain the terms in the figure, the "power switch" is the "power switch" described using FIG. 2, and the "door state" is the state of the door (front door 102) (closed or open). , and the “door sensor” is the “open/close sensor (detection means)” described with reference to FIG.

Further, the "setting key" is the "setting key" described with reference to FIG. 1, and the "setting value display means" is the "setting value display device 101a" described with reference to FIGS. The external collective terminal board LED is the "external collective terminal board LED" described with reference to FIG.

Further, the "liquid crystal display device" is the "liquid crystal display device 157 (display means)" described with reference to FIG. 1, and the title panel lamp is the title panel lamp 162 (light emission means) described with reference to FIG. The upper and side lamps are the upper lamp 142 (light emitting means) and the side lamp 144 (light emitting means) described with reference to FIG. 14, and the speakers are the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIGS. (sound output means).

<Example 1 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing example 1 of the setting change operation in chronological order.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / power off, door closed>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(1) is a state in which the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is closed, and the setting key is OFF.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the set value display means is not displayed, and the external common terminal board LED, the liquid crystal display device, the title panel lamp, and the upper and side lamps are all displayed. The light goes out and the speaker stops emitting sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/power OFF, door closed → door open, setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) is the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(1), in which the power supply is turned off, the door is closed, and the setting key is turned off. It is in a state of being turned ON from OFF.

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the setting key changes from OFF to ON. Although it changes to the ON state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the setting value display means is not displayed, and the external common terminal board LED, liquid crystal display device, title panel lamp, upper/side lamp are extinguished, and the speaker stops outputting sound.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / power OFF → power ON, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(3) is a state in which the power switch is turned from OFF to ON in the state shown in FIG.

In this state, the power switch changes from ON to OFF, and since the power switch has changed from OFF to ON, the door sensor detects the opening of the door and changes to ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display means. (in this example, 1 indicating setting 1) is displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED is outputting a control signal (in this example, information indicating that the setting is being changed) from the external centralized terminal board Illuminates to indicate that the

In addition, a first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the Since the open state of the front door 102 is detected), the first notification is performed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. , the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white, thereby executing the first light emission notification IF1c.

<Example of setting change operation 1/door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(4) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the door is being opened, the setting key is ON, and the first notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(3). .

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF. The LED continues to light.

In addition, a first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , performs the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similarly to the second notification IF2 described with reference to FIG. By displaying the character string "please open", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the voice "please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is output from the speakers 272 and 277. By doing so, the second voice notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all turned on to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is turned on in white. is executing the light emission notification IF2c.

<Example of setting change operation 1/door closed, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened while the door is closed, the setting key is ON, and the second notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(4). .

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and a second state (this In the example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102) to the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the front Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected), the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. , the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white, thereby executing the first light emission notification IF1c.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / Setting change operation during door opening and first notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(6) are states in which the setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. .

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed (setting change operation), so the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the setting value after the change (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / door open, setting key ON, lever operation during first notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(7) are states in which the start lever 135 is pressed down after the setting change operation shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(6).

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the operation of confirming the set value by the start lever 135) is performed, so the first notification is continued. At the same time, the setting value is confirmed as setting 2, and a numerical value (0 in this example) indicating that the setting value is confirmed is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / Door open, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned off from ON after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(7).

In this state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation with the setting key has been canceled), operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135, etc.) ) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), and the normal game state in which normal games can be performed is entered. Along with the shift, the first notification is ended, and the setting change end notification and demonstration effect are started.

Specifically, by outputting a voice saying "The setting has been changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the end of the setting change mode is notified, and a demonstration animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demo pattern corresponding to the demonstration effect, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

<Example of setting change operation 1/door open, setting key OFF → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(9) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON in the setting key OFF state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8).

In the same state, since the setting key has changed from OFF to ON while the power is ON (a certain operation was performed using the setting key), operations related to setting confirmation (in this example, operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135) (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), and in the first state Execute setting confirmation notification.

Specifically, by displaying a character string “confirming settings” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 , the setting confirmation notification display is performed to suggest that the setting confirmation is possible, and the speaker 272 , 277 outputs a sound "setting is being checked" to execute a setting confirmation voice notification suggesting that the setting can be confirmed, and all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 are turned on to turn on the blue light. By emitting light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in blue, setting confirmation light emitting notification is executed to suggest that setting confirmation is possible.

<Example 2 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15B is a diagram showing example 2 of the setting change operation in chronological order. 15(a)(1) to 15(a)(1) to 15(b)(9). Since it is the same state as (a)(3), (a)(8), and (a)(9) in FIG.

<Example 2 of setting change operation / door open, setting key ON, setting change operation during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) is a state in which a setting change operation has been performed in the state shown in FIG.

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed (setting change operation), so the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the setting value after the change (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 2 of setting change operation / door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) with the door open and the setting key ON.

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF. The LED continues to light.

In addition, a first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , performs the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similarly to the second notification IF2 described with reference to FIG. By displaying the character string "please open", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the voice "please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is output from the speakers 272 and 277. By doing so, the second voice notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all turned on to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is turned on in white. is executing the light emission notification IF2c.

<Example 2 of setting change operation / door closed, setting key ON, lever operation during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(6) is a state in which the start lever 135 is pressed down during the door closing, setting key ON, and second notification shown in FIG. 15(b)(5). .

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and opened/closed) is acceptable for operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135). In the state where the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the operation of confirming the set value by the start lever 135) is performed, so the second notification is continued. At the same time, the setting value is confirmed as setting 2, and a numerical value (0 in this example) indicating that the setting value is confirmed is displayed on the setting value display means.

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is operated to confirm the set value). is executed, the operation is accepted, and the operation of the first operating means (start lever 135) is executed, the operation is accepted.

According to this example, since the operation by the first operation means is accepted in either the first state or the second state, convenience for the amusement arcade clerk can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, before and after the operation of the first operation means is executed in the first state (in this example, the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first notification (In this example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) is executed, and the second notification (this example Then, the second notification IF2) shown in FIG. 14(c) is executed.

According to this example, since the same notification is executed before and after the operation of the first operation means is executed, the game clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the setting.

<Example of setting change operation 2/door closed, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(7) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(b)(6).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and a second state (this In the example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102) to the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the front Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected), the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. , the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white, thereby executing the first light emission notification IF1c.

<Example 3 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing example 3 of the setting change operation in chronological order. (a)(3), (a)(10) to (a)(11) in FIG. (b) Since it is the same state as (9), its description is omitted.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/door open, door sensor ON → door sensor OFF, second notification>
16(a)(4) is a state in which the door sensor is forcibly turned off while the front door 102 remains open in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(3) with the door open and the setting key ON. is.

In the same state, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the door sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like. By shielding the light from the light emitting part of the door sensor, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the door sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (door pseudo-closed). Although the sensor detects the closing of the door and changes from ON to OFF, the set value display means continues to display, and the external common terminal board LED continues lighting.

In addition, a first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , performs the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similarly to the second notification IF2 described with reference to FIG. By displaying the character string "please open", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the voice "please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is output from the speakers 272 and 277. By doing so, the second voice notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all turned on to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is turned on in white. is executing the light emission notification IF2c.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-close, setting change operation during second notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(5) are states in which a setting change operation is performed during the door pseudo-closed second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(4).

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) is operated (setting change operation), so the second notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the setting value after the change (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 3 of setting change operation / fake door closed, lever operation during second notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(6) are states in which the start lever 135 is pressed down after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(5).

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is operated (operation to confirm the setting change), so the second notification , the setting value is confirmed as setting 2, and a numerical value (0 in this example) indicating that the setting value is confirmed is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closed, setting key OFF during second notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and (7) is a state in which the setting key is turned off from ON after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(a) and (6).

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed after the operation of the start lever 135) (the operation of confirming the setting change) is executed, The setting change mode is maintained while the operation of the second operation means is not accepted and the second notification is continued (the setting change mode cannot be terminated).

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is operated to confirm the set value). is executed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operation means is accepted, while the second operation means After the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 confirms the set value) in the state (in this example, the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operation means is not accepted.

According to this example, since the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state, the store clerk understands that the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be grasped by whether or not the operation of the second operation means is accepted.

Even if the second operation means is operated (operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) during execution of the second notification, the notification means continues to execute the second notification. good. According to this example, even if the unauthorized person operates the setting key during the operation of the amusement arcade, the second notification is made.

Further, the notification means may continue the execution of the second notification even if the second operation means is operated (even if the setting key is removed) during the execution of the second notification. According to this example, even if the setting key is pulled out by the fraudulent person during the operation of the game parlor, the second notification is made, so that the staff of the amusement parlor may notice the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door false closing, setting key OFF during second notification → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7) where the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) is executed after the operation of the start lever 135) (operation of confirming the setting change) is executed, The setting change mode is maintained while the operation of the second operation means is not accepted and the second notification is continued.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/door pseudo closed, second notification in progress → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(9) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened during the door quasi-closed second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(8).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and a second state (this In the example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the front Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected), the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. , the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white, thereby executing the first light emission notification IF1c.

<Example 4 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing example 4 of the setting change operation in chronological order. 15(b)(1) to 15(b)(7) are the same as those in FIG. 15(a)(1) to 15(a)(7), so description thereof will be omitted. .

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurrence>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(0) is a state in which an error (first error) has occurred.

In this state, since an error occurs when the power is ON, the door is open, and the setting key is OFF, an error notification indicating that an error has occurred is executed.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error display suggesting that a first error has occurred (in this example, a display including a character string "first error has occurred") is performed, and the speaker is displayed. 272 and 277 output an error sound suggesting that a first error has occurred (in this example, the sound "first error has occurred"), and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are turned off by the first error. Error notification is performed by lighting (blinking in red in this example) in an error notification mode suggesting that a has occurred and displaying an error code on the payout number indicator 127 .

Errors (first errors) that can occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, winning errors, and the like.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals stay, and the corresponding error code is E1, for example. The medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is greater than or equal to a specified number, and the corresponding error code is E2, for example. Medal insertion error 2 can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing, and the corresponding error code is E3, for example. Medal insertion error 4 occurs when inserted medals do not pass normally through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. Medal insertion abnormality 3 and medal insertion abnormality 4 are resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is E4, for example. Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is E5, for example. Medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and the corresponding error code is E5, for example. Any of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is E7, for example. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is E8, for example. The RAM defect is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the corresponding error code is E9, for example. The prize-winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, and can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine (first error) include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame Examples include open error, RAM clear error, impact sensor error, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/error occurrence, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(b)(7).

In this state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation with the setting key has been canceled), operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135, etc.) ) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), and the normal game state in which normal games can be performed is entered. Along with the transition, the first notification is terminated, and the error notification interrupted in the setting change mode is resumed.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error display suggesting that a first error has occurred (in this example, a display including a character string "first error has occurred") is performed, and the speaker is displayed. 272 and 277 output an error sound suggesting that a first error has occurred (in this example, the sound "first error has occurred"), and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are turned off by the first error. Error notification is performed by lighting (blinking in red in this example) in an error notification mode suggesting that a has occurred and displaying an error code on the payout number indicator 127 .

<Example 4 of setting change operation/error occurrence, setting key OFF → error resolution>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(9) is a state in which the error is resolved and the reset SW is turned ON in the state shown in FIG.

In this state, the error has been resolved and the reset switch has changed from OFF to ON. state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) is terminated, and the normal game state is shifted to the normal game state, and an error notification is issued. It is finished, and the setting change end notification and demonstration production are started.

Specifically, by outputting a voice saying "The setting has been changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the end of the setting change mode is notified, and a demonstration animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demonstration pattern, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps). ), wherein the notification means is in a first state (for example, front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), means for executing the first notification (for example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)), and the The notification means is in a second state in which an operation related to the setting change can be accepted (for example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and an open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or a state in which the front door 102 is closed) It is a means for executing a second notification (for example, a second notification IF2 shown in FIG. The gaming machine may be characterized in that the second notification is different from the first notification. .

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the staff of the amusement parlor can grasp the state of the amusement machine when the setting is changed based on the notification mode by the notification means, and can appropriately execute the setting change. can.

Further, a first operation means (for example, a start lever 135) is provided, and when the operation of the first operation means (for example, a set value confirmation operation by the start lever 135) is executed in the first state, The operation may be accepted when the operation is accepted and the operation of the first operating means is executed in the second state.

With such a configuration, the operation by the first operating means can be accepted in either the first state or the second state, so that the convenience for the amusement arcade clerk can be enhanced.

Further, a second operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided, and after the operation of the first operation means (for example, a set value confirmation operation by the start lever 135) is executed in the first state, the second operation means is operated. When an operation of the second operating means (for example, an operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, and the operation of the first operating means is performed in the second state. When the operation of the second operation means is performed after the operation has been performed, the operation of the second operation means may not be accepted.

With such a configuration, since the operation of the second operating means cannot be accepted in the second state, the amusement arcade clerk is informed that the operation of the second operating means cannot be accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be grasped by whether or not the operation of the second operation means is accepted.

In addition, the notification means executes the first notification before and after the operation of the first operation means (for example, the setting value confirmation operation by the start lever 135) is executed in the first state. The notification means may be means for executing the second notification before and after the operation of the first operation means is performed in the first state.

With such a configuration, since the same notification is executed before and after the operation of the first operation means is executed, the game clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the setting.

Further, a detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) for detecting an open/closed state of the door (for example, the front door 102) is provided, and the first state is a state in which the detection means detects the open state of the door, The second state may be a state in which the detection means detects the closed state of the door.

With such a configuration, since the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed, the store clerk can appropriately change the settings. In addition, since the notification is made different depending on whether the door is open or closed during the operation of the amusement arcade, the clerk of the amusement arcade may notice the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person.

Further, the door may be closed in the second state, and the door may be opened in the second state.

With such a configuration, even if the door is closed by a fraudulent person during the operation of the amusement arcade, the second notification is made. There is

In addition, the first notification is not limited to a notification suggesting that the setting is being changed, for example, a display suggesting that an operation related to the setting change is possible (e.g., "You can change the setting or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is valid").

Further, the first notification is, in addition to (or instead of) notification suggesting that the setting is being changed, notification suggesting that the open/close sensor is detecting the open state of the door (for example, , a display including a character string such as "the door is being opened", an audio output such as "the door is being opened", flashing of various lamps, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the second notification is not limited to a notification that calls attention to a setting change. For example, a display indicating that an operation related to a setting change is impossible It may be a display including a character string, or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification prompting an operation that enables setting changes (for example, "Please close the door"). may be a display including a character string such as

Further, the second notification is, in addition to (or instead of) the notification for calling attention to the setting change, a notification suggesting that the open/close sensor is detecting the closed state of the door (for example, " Display including character strings such as "Door is closed" and "Door is being pseudo-closed", output voice such as "Door is being closed" and "Door is being pseudo-closed", blink various lamps, etc.). may

Further, the first operation means is not limited to the start lever 135 and the setting switch, and may be other operation means such as a production button, and the second operation means is not limited to the setting key. , reset switch, or other operating means.

In addition, even if a certain error (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means , a first state (for example, the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to setting change (for example, operation of a setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted (for example, the front door 102 is open); state is detected), the first notification (for example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) may be executed without executing the error notification.

With such a configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, and the convenience for the store clerk at the amusement arcade can be enhanced.

In addition, even if a certain error (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means , the notification means is in a second state in which an operation related to the setting change can be accepted (for example, the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification (for example, the second notification IF2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) is executed. may

With such a configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, and the convenience for the store clerk at the amusement arcade can be enhanced.

Further, in the state where the certain error occurs, the first state (for example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), or the first state Two states (for example, the state where the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102) detected state), and after that, when the certain error continues in the state where the first state or the second state ends, the reporting means outputs the first reporting or Instead of the second notification, error notification suggesting that a certain error has occurred (for example, error display suggesting that a certain error has occurred, outputting an error sound, or lighting a lamp in an error notification manner suggesting that an error has occurred).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably handle an error after executing a setting change operation.

<<other embodiments>>
17 to 32, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 17 to 32 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 17 to 32 in principle. In the description using FIG. 32, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 17 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the figure) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 20) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 18 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, among the lines shown in FIG. 30, the upper line L4 is used as an active line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a 3-coin betting machine, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines are activated, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 is activated. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 19(a)) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. The rendering device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a rendering image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

19A and 19B are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 19A is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened, and FIG. It is the figure which expanded the door relay board|substrate 290 arrange|positioned.

The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board housing case 210 . On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board storage case 220 containing the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 25) is arranged. be. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement arcade) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the game mode (also referred to as set value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed set value. Here, the set value refers to the ratio of the total number of game media put out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. This value is a so-called “payout rate”, and can be set in multiple stages, for example, from “1” to “6”.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting a predetermined setting key (not shown) and turning it. Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when the setting key switch 281 is rotated counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is detected. Detect the OFF state.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is provided on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power supply control board 252B (see FIG. 25) is provided. ) is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252 . Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply 252 . With this power switch 244, the slot machine 100 can be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

On the right side of the hopper unit 180, an auxiliary medal storage box 240 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180 is arranged, behind which an overflow terminal is arranged (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 . An open sensor 294 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 102 . The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is arranged below the design display window 113 on the rear surface of the front door 102 . This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a set value display 293, as shown in FIG. 19(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push-button type switch, and by pressing (short-term pressing) the reset switch 291, the error of the slot machine 100 can be canceled.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291 . An operation procedure for changing the setting value by using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. The set value display 293 can display the game modes (set values) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292 in numbers.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed numerically, it can be used to confirm the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), setting value confirmation processing for confirming the setting value is started, and the setting key switch 281 , and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be described. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF→ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cutoff state (power OFF) to the power ON state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (set value change processing is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (set value) changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired game mode can be selected. can. By operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value changing process is completed.

In the following, the period of the setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key is also referred to as the setting value change mode. The period of the setting value confirmation operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting value confirmation operation is also called a setting value confirmation mode.

Here, the conditions for starting and ending the set value change mode and the set value confirmation mode will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the condition for starting the set value change mode is (1) that the power is turned on when the setting key switch 281 is ON, and (2) that the front door 102 is open. , is not a condition. In addition, conditions for terminating the set value change mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the condition for starting the set value confirmation mode is to turn on the setting key switch 281 while the power is on, and (2) the front door 102 is open. is not a condition. In addition, the conditions for ending the setting value confirmation mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the setting value change mode (setting value confirmation mode) does not require that the front door 102 be in an open state. requires that the front door 102 be in an open state. If an attempt is made to start the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing) while the front door 102 is closed, the start condition is cleared, so the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing) is not started based on the illegal act. It is possible to start execution. However, since the termination condition cannot be cleared, the fraudulent person cannot terminate the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing). Therefore, it becomes easy to arrest the fraudster on the spot.

In the set value change mode, effect devices such as the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the title panel lamp 164, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to indicate that the set value is being changed. In the setting value confirmation mode, the effect device is used to notify that the setting value is being confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as setting value confirmation notification). )I do.

Next, the structure of reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the structure of the reel unit 700. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 20, the reel unit 700 includes a left reel unit 700L, a middle reel unit 700C and a right reel unit 700R inside a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. Connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 for connecting with the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 25) are provided on the upper portion of the reel case 702. FIG. A left reel 110 is arranged in the left reel unit 700L, a middle reel 111 is arranged in the middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel 112 is arranged in the right reel unit 700R. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m and 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m-112m is a stepping motor. The left reel unit 700L will be described below as an example, but the same applies to the middle reel unit 700C and the right reel unit 700R. In the left reel unit 700L, a motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the belt-shaped member 710 of the reel 110, It is attached to the mounting base 732 .

The replacement work can be performed for each of the reel units 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, if the left reel unit 700L fails, only the left reel unit 700L can be replaced with a new reel unit.

21(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 21(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . The reflector 742 has three vertically arranged openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side. Also, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 30) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) has 16 contacts, a rotatable circular rotary portion 190a, and a circular rotary portion 190a protruding outward from the rotary portion 190a. and an instruction unit 190b. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to externally output the numerical information indicated by the indicator 190b as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is indicated, the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control section 400, the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b is treated as the selected setting value.

Incidentally, instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 22(b) may be applied, or a slide switch as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 22(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. . Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the numerical value seen from the notch 191b is "F", the numerical value of hexadecimal F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is represented by a 4-bit binary code. can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, selects a numerical value visible from the notch 191b of the rotary switch 191 (hex 0 to Any of the numerical values of F) can be detected.

A slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 22(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into a binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to select a value (0 to F in hexadecimal) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is positioned. Either) can be detected.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 22(a) to 22(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, since a number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 22D is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as the confirmation button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operation means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected set value is confirmed. Alternatively, the set value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected set value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to detect which of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 has been operated. It has a configuration that allows

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be backed up.

FIG. 22(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, under the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hit effects, etc., and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. may Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. In FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the power saving mode is set only while the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the power saving mode is set when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. Also, in the non-power saving mode, mute can be selected.

FIG. 23(A) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23A displays that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "Mute". In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 are completely inaudible.

FIG. 23(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 22(a).

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23B, characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-level volume level is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 23(C) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 22(a).

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(C), characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven-step volume level is 7 are displayed. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 23(D) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23D displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In place of the exhibition volume, a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 but can be selected only with the first selection switch 190 may be selected. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 22(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). In the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(a), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 7 are displayed. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are illuminated in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 23(b) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(b) displays the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. there is In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. When setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is not set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23(B) is the same as the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. The volume output with the selection value and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23(a) are also the same.

FIG. 23A shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). In the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a), characters of "volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five-step volume level is 1 are displayed. Also, in the five-stage level display, only the lowest level, the first stage, is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 23(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 23(a) shows a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 23(a).

In the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a), characters "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values in the seven steps are 18 for the first step, 36 for the second step, 54 for the third step, and 4 steps. The number is 73, the 5th row is 91, the 6th row is 109, and the 7th row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only the store clerk of the amusement arcade can select the first set value (18) of the seven steps and the seventh set value (127). In addition, the 1st stage (18) of 7 stages may be the 1st stage of 5 stages, the 5th stage (91) of 7 stages may be the 5th stage of 5 stages, or the 3rd stage of 7 stages (54 ) may be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth step. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the intention of the player can be prioritized. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a left reel 110 sensor. index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 controls the drive circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 for driving, a drive circuit 326 for driving a motor 180m (see FIG. 25) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (active line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game token insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Each component of the main controller 300 described above is mounted on the main controller substrate 300B (see FIG. 25).

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor 163m (see FIG. 25) of the shutter 163. As shown in FIG. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-controller 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-controller board 400B (see FIG. 25).

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight built into the first chance button 165. The module 740 receives control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit, the hopper unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 25 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 25 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . 25 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A hopper motor driving IC 326i and a reel motor driving IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit forming the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the main control board 300B has the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, and the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4, to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected, and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 700 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also shows the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, on the first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 25, there are a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the production movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, respectively, and the motor 163m provided in the production movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 also includes a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG. 24, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may be in a state where no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, as shown in FIG. 26, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown at 25 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not normally connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 as viewed obliquely from above.

The connector HC1 shown in FIG. 25 is also shown in the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 27(a). The hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals and a disk-shaped hopper disc 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181 . Part of the hopper disk 182 is visible in FIG. 27(a). The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passing holes 1821 spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole of a size through which medals, which are game media, can pass. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by the motor 180m (see FIG. 25), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passing holes 1821.

FIG. 27(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 27(b) shows the hopper disc 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passage holes 1821 can be seen. Even in the power-off state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in both forward and reverse directions by inserting a finger into the medal passage hole 1821 .

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, the motor 180m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the hopper disk 182 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated by the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. On the other hand, if the harness MH is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or the connector MC1, no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. However, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

After that, the induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 flows through the power control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B in the same way as the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the boards 252B and 400B are lit. Therefore, similarly to when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated while the power is off, the number of movable bodies to be manually rotated increases, so that the monitor LED emits bright light. Become.

Further, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 17 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 25) that opens and closes the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 25 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 28, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 28, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700. It is

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided. Even in the connection example in FIG. 28, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are disconnected or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Also, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, etc. LED does not light up.

In the example of connection shown in FIG. 28, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the example of connection shown in FIG. It is more likely that a poor physical connection will occur. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disc 182 and the shutter 163 are used as the movable bodies, but they are not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor can be used. good.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. The following description will focus on points that differ from the internal configuration described with reference to FIG. 3, and redundant description may be omitted. In addition, the same reference numerals as those used so far may be used for the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements described so far.

FIG. 29( a ) shows a state in which the front door 102 is opened up to 180 degrees with respect to the main body 101 . As a result, both the inner side of the main body 101 and the inner side of the front door 102 face forward (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 29).

A reel unit 700 is attached to the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 29(a). A main control board storage case 210 is arranged above the reel unit 700 . The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or translucent resin case and has translucency. A main control board 300B is housed in the main control board housing case 210 . The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG. LED5ML is shown. Further, on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a), an LED 3ML for error monitoring and a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292, which are operation means, are also mounted. That is, these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) as light emitting means and the setting key switch 281 and setting change button 292 as operating means are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). Also, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or translucent main control board storage case 210, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. FIG. Further, the main control board storage case 210 is provided with openings and notches so that these operation means (281, 292) can be operated. In addition, on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a), each circuit component (substrate component) such as a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, etc. is displayed for identification. is displayed. Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED1" is displayed under the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, and "LED2" is displayed under the main control 5V monitor LED5ML. "LED3" is displayed under the LED3ML for error monitoring, "setting key SW" is displayed under the setting key switch 281, and "setting change button" is displayed under the setting change button 292. is displayed. These displays are visible through the transparent or translucent main control board housing case 210 . Note that "24V monitor LED" may be displayed instead of "LED1", and "SW1" may be displayed instead of "setting key SW". That is, the name or abbreviation of each component may be displayed, or the identification number or identification symbol may be displayed. At the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210, a sticker 210S with the control number of the housed board printed thereon is affixed. Although this seal 210S is non-translucent, it may be transparent or translucent. Also, the seal may be a sticker with a seal or a handwritten display. Alternatively, it may be a display directly printed on the main control board storage case 210 instead of a sticker.

A power supply device 252 and a hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700 . The power supply device 252 includes a power control board 252B having the same configuration as the power control board 252B shown in FIG. The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a) is housed in a transparent or translucent resin case. 29A shows a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and a power switch 244. FIG. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) as light emitting means and the power switch 244 as operating means are provided on a common board (power control board 252B). Light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power control board 252B also passes through the transparent or translucent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. The case of the power supply device 252 is also provided with openings and notches so that the power switch 244 can be touched. Further, on the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a), as with the main control board 300B, an identification display is displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29A, "LED7" is displayed under the power control 24V monitor LED24PL, and "LED8" is displayed under the power control 5V monitor LED5PL. “POWER SW” is displayed below the power switch 244 . These indications are visible through a transparent or translucent case. The case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LED as the light emitting means and the switch as the operating means are provided on the surface of the metal case so that the light emitting means can be visually recognized and the operating means can be operated. An identification mark is also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The positions of the main control board 300B, the sub-control board 400B', and the power supply device 252 may be above or below the movable units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180. Alternatively, some or all of them may be at the same height position.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, the first sub-control board storage case 220 is arranged on the left side plate 260 of the main body 101, but in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the sub-control part storage case 220 ′ is located on the top of the front door 102 . That is, it is arranged behind the production device 160 . The sub-control unit storage case 220′ is also a transparent or translucent resin case and has translucency. A sub control board 400B' is housed in this sub control board housing case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is an effect control board combining the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 25 and the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. , or the configuration may include only the control board of the second sub-controller 500 . FIG. 29(a) shows the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B′ shown in FIG. 29(a) also has a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL for monitoring the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control section 500 and a first selection switch 190 as an operating means. Implemented. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) as light-emitting means and the first selection switch 190 as operation means are provided on a common board (sub-control board 400B'). Also, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or translucent sub-control board storage case 220', and the light emission of the LEDs is confirmed through the sub-control board storage case 220'. be able to. Further, the sub-control board storage case 220′ is also provided with openings and notches so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. Further, on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a), as with the main control board 300B, an identification display is displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29A, "LED4" is displayed under the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, and "LED5" is displayed under the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL. "LED6" is displayed under the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED6SL, and "selection SW" is displayed under the first selection switch 190. FIG. At the lower right corner of the sub-control board 400B', a display 4001 of "board control number 0002" printed in two stages on the resist layer of the board is displayed. The identification display for each circuit component and the display 4001 of "board control number 0002" are visible through the transparent or translucent sub control board storage case 220'.

FIG. 29(b) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H1 in a standing posture, and FIG. 29(c) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in a sitting posture. be.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views is in a state where the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, and the side of the main body 100 is shown with the front door opened 90 degrees. 102 shows the front. Persons H1 and H2 shown in these side views are factory inspectors and amusement store personnel who need to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110-112 of the reel unit 700. clerk, and is located directly in front of the main body 101 .

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the visual field V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the respective LEDs such as the error monitoring LED 3ML mounted on the main control board 300B that emits light as a result can be visually recognized at the same time, or the line of sight is moved slightly upward. visible only.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the visual field range V2 of a person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees is the range from the reel unit 700 to the power supply 252 located therebelow. Then, the reels 110 to 112 operated by hand and the LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the power supply 252 that emits light as a result can be visually recognized at the same time, or can be visually recognized by simply moving the line of sight slightly up and down. is. Also, the power supply 252 and its adjacent hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 29(a)) are also within the field of view V2, and the manually actuated hopper disc 182 (see FIG. 27) and the resulting illuminating power supply Each LED such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the device 252 can be visually recognized at the same time, or can be visually recognized only by slightly moving the line of sight left and right.

29(b) and 29(c) schematically show the main control board 300B in an easy-to-understand manner. However, actually, as shown in FIG. be. That is, the movable body unit protrudes from the light emitting means toward the person who operates the movable body by hand. Therefore, it is difficult to see the main control board 300B from below the main control board 300B because the reel unit 700 becomes an obstacle.

FIG. 30 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. That is, FIG. 30 is a view of the slot machine of the second embodiment viewed from above, with the lower side of the drawing being the front side and the upper side being the rear side.

FIG. 30(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is completely closed, and FIG. A state in which the door 102 is opened 90 degrees is shown.

Main body 101 in FIG. 30(a) shows main control board storage case 210 in which main control board 300B is stored, and reel unit 700. As shown in FIG. Three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a setting key switch 281 are shown on the main control board 300B. A sticker 210S affixed to the front surface of the main control board storage case 210 is also shown.

The front door 102 in FIG. 30(a) shows a sub control board storage case 220' in which the sub control board 400B' is stored. Three LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) and the first selection switch 190 are shown on the sub-control board 400B'.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 completely closed, none of the light-emitting means (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.) that emits light by manually operating the movable bodies such as the reels 110 to 112 and the hopper disc 182 is installed in the slot machine. It is not visible from the exterior of 100.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees shown in FIG. 30(b), the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches is schematically shown in gray. It should be noted that the way in which the reachable range of light is indicated here is a way of indicating that emphasizes the directivity of the LED, and in fact, the closer to the LED, the more the surroundings of this range are illuminated. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches a part of the front door 102 opened 90 degrees. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', making it possible to operate the first selection switch 190 even in a dark place. In addition, light reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 30(b)), and the circuit components can be visually recognized even in a dark place. . Furthermore, the identification display displayed for each circuit component can also be visually recognized. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the display 4001 of "board control number 0002" printed on the sub control board 400B', so that the board control number can be confirmed even in a dark place. Also, the seal 210S described with reference to FIG. 292(a) is non-translucent, but in a dark place, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML illuminates the surroundings of the seal 210S. You will be able to see what is displayed in In addition, if the seal 210S is translucent, it is easier to confirm. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', and when a sticker is attached to that part, the contents displayed on the sticker can also be checked.

In addition, in this FIG. 30(b), only the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches is schematically shown, but the light due to the back electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, and the sub control board Most of the storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' are visible even in a dark place.

As described above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B is emitted from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML), which is a board different from the board on which the 3ML) is mounted, and the sub-control board storage case 220' that houses the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, and may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer to 180 degrees, the more difficult it is for the light to reach. Conversely, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub control board 400B' reaches the main control board storage case 210 and the main control board 300B.

In most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B', light generated by the back electromotive force is also emitted from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B'. reaches and becomes visible even in the dark. Furthermore, most of the main control board housing case 210 and most of the main control board 300B receive light from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B due to the back electromotive force, making it dark. Visible anywhere.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example shown in FIG. 25 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals as those used so far are used for the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements described so far.

In the modification of the connection example shown in FIG. 31, a protection circuit is provided to protect circuit components from a surge current flowing in the opposite direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 for protecting the reel motor drive IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit for protecting various ICs. The protection circuit PT1 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power line, and the protection circuit PT2 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power line. Also, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 for protecting the movable body motor drive IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit for protecting various ICs. The protection circuit PT4 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT5 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 5V power supply line. Also, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT6.

In the power control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power line. Also, the power control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT9, and the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT10. The protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 with large-capacity capacitors can absorb the charge amount of the surge power and prevent circuit breakage due to the surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 absorb the charge amount of the back electromotive force, and the current due to the back electromotive force does not flow. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 and the reels 110 to 112 are manually operated, none of the LEDs emit light when these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9 and PT10 are functioning. On the other hand, if a part of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, PT10 is damaged, the damaged protection circuit cannot absorb the back electromotive force, and current due to the back electromotive force flows. , a luminous LED comes out. Therefore, it may be possible to identify the protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, PT10 suspected of being broken depending on which LED emits light when the disc 182 or the reels 110 to 112 are manually operated.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(a), the protection circuit PT11 is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. A protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 32(a) is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(b), the protection circuit PT21 is connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but may be a coil or the like) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. with diodes connected. The protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG. 32(b) is connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but may be a coil or the like) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. diode.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, the reverse surge current can be prevented from flowing due to the rectifying action of the diode.

The current due to the back electromotive force generated by manually operating the movable body such as the reel 110 also stops flowing due to the rectifying action of the diodes employed in the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, PT22, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control The 5V monitor LED5ML does not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, the current will not flow in either direction due to the insulated state, and the current due to the back electromotive force will not flow either. Even if the movable body such as 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not emit light, but if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, they become insulated. A current flows through other elements connected in parallel, and a current due to back electromotive force also flows. be. Therefore, unless the protection circuit PT3 with a large capacity capacitor is used (in the main control board 300B shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. control 24V capacitor 24MC is used), and when the movable body such as the reel 110 is operated by hand and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML emit light, the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, PT22 It is suspected that the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12 are damaged or disconnected, and that an unauthorized person has installed an unauthorized circuit that bypasses the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12.

The above description is the same for the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22, and the movable body includes a sprocket rotated by a payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 22), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a de-energized state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 22) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are turned on by this induced current if normal. do. Also, as in the above description, the induced current flowing into the main control board 156P passes through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 22) and flows to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 22). If there is, LEDs provided on the substrates 182P and 160P are turned on. Furthermore, as the movable body, two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-controller, and the effect movable body (for example, Kroon) that is driven by the motor whose rotation is controlled by the main controller. It may be a production movable body or the like.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted. That is, the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, Sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML, second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED , 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], a motor [eg, motor 180 m, 110 m to 112 m, motor 163 m, dispensing motor, etc.] and a movable body operable by driving the motor [eg, hopper disk 182 , left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.] , a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, and harness SD] relaying the board and the movable body unit, wherein the motor and the light emitting means connect the harness. The substrate is provided with impedance adjusting means [for example, adjusting resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR)] between the light emitting means and the ground. The impedance adjusting means adjusts the impedance so that the light emitting means emits light by the induced current generated by the back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state. On the other hand, the impedance is adjusted so as to regulate the flow of the induced current in the energized state, and the light emitting means is generated by the motor by manually operating the movable body in the energized state to drive the motor. It may emit light when a current [for example, an induced current] due to counter electromotive force flows.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, the movable body can be operated manually to check whether the harness is properly connected. , the light emitting means is easily visible.

Also,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor-side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by 』
also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
wherein the movable unit is electrically connected [for example, via a harness] to the light emitting means,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off.

After the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance is installed, whether or not the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The power failure state may be a state in which the power switch of the game machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state where power is not supplied from the island facility.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [eg reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [eg hopper unit 180], or an effect operation unit [eg effect movable body unit 160U] (same hereafter).

Also,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising detachable harnesses (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relay the board and the movable unit. 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, the amusement machine electrically checks whether the harness is properly connected or whether the harness is disconnected. It can be checked even if it is disconnected.

The board may be a board having a main control section [for example, main control boards 300B and 156P], or a board having a sub-control section [for example, first sub-control boards 400B and 160P and second sub-control boards. control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, power supply control boards 252B, 182P]. Alternatively, it may be a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B, a reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, a plurality of harnesses MR11 and MR12 in series]. Also,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to check the electrical connection in the energized state.

Also,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
When the light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force flows in (hereinafter referred to as " In the first case, light emission continues even after the motor stops driving [for example, light emission is caused by the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC. case of continuing], and the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, the movable body can be operated manually to check whether the harness is properly connected. , the light emitting means is easily visible. In addition, the light emitting means may continue to emit light even when the current due to the back electromotive force does not flow in. Therefore, the light emitting means may continue to emit light while the movable body is being preoccupied with manual operation. Even if there is no time to confirm the light emission of the means, the light emission of the light emission means can be confirmed after the operation.

Also,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor-side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by 』
also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). In some cases, light emission continues even when the motor stops driving [for example, light emission continues due to the electric charge stored in the capacitor].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed even if the movable body is stopped from being operated manually, and the light emission of the light emitting means can be easily confirmed. .

Also,
"Capacitors capable of accumulating charges generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by comprising a secondary control 24V capacitor 24SC]. 』
also explained.

A general electronic component called a capacitor can be used to make it easier to check the light emission of the light emitting means.

Also,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising detachable harnesses (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relay the board and the movable unit. 』
also explained.

Also,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first harness is properly connected, and manually operate the third movable body. When operated, it is possible to confirm whether the connection of the third harness is normally performed, and it is possible to independently confirm the connection of each of the two types of harnesses. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, one common harness in which three harnesses MR1 to MR3 are assembled]. ,
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness,
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether the harness is properly connected whether the first movable body is operated manually or the third movable body is operated manually. Further, the connection of one common harness can be confirmed by operating the movable body, which is easier to manually operate, out of the first movable body and the third movable body. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the common light emitting means. It can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The movable body unit may have a fourth movable body [eg, the middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving a fourth motor [eg, the motor 111m].

Also,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A detachable harness [for example, harness MR1 and harnesses MR1 to MR3 or harness MR11 and harness MR12 or harness MR11 to MR31 and harness MR12 to 32] for relaying the substrate and the first motor is provided. playground. 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

A detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11 and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor, and a detachable third harness that relays the board and the third motor. harness [for example, harness MR3, harness MR31 and harness MR32].

Also,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the third movable body.

Also,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
In a power-off state, the light-emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [eg, an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [e.g., motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [e.g., harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light-emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the de-energized state to drive the second motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, by manually operating the movable body (the first movable body) of the first movable body unit, it is possible to confirm whether the first harness is properly connected. By operating the movable body (the second movable body) of the second movable body unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the connection of the second harness is normally performed. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, the connection of each of the two types of harnesses can be confirmed separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized.

Also,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The first harness includes a first motor-side harness [eg, harness MR12] and a first light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MR11],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the first motor [e.g., motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [e.g., harness MR12],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the first light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MR11]. can be,
The second harness includes a second motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2] and a second light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the second light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1]. be,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emission is used to determine whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission of the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when each movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it is easy to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

Also,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected, and the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

Also,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the motion of the first movable body and the motion of the second movable body.

Also,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power failure state. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally and to confirm whether the second movable unit is normally connected only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means. It becomes easy to confirm whether or not is electrically connected normally.

According to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among the LED for signal monitoring, the 7-segment display, the set value display, etc.];
Operable by driving a motor [eg motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harness SD],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state, and receiving a current (for example, an induced current) generated by the counter electromotive force generated by the motor. The second light-emitting means also receives a current (for example, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state. It may emit light by
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the common movable body, whether or not the connection of the common harness is normally performed can be confirmed by both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, Even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is damaged or out of order, it can be confirmed by the other light emitting means. Furthermore, since both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on the stationary side (non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The substrate is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor-side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32]. can be,
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] via the light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31]. and
The certain board is electrically connected to the second light emitting means [eg, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31]. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among signal monitoring LEDs, 7-segment indicators, set value indicators, etc.];
Operable by driving a motor [eg motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The movable unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The movable body unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when power is cut off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when power is cut off.

After installing the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the plurality of light emitting means. It can be confirmed even when the game machine is in a power failure state. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually confirm the game table even without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is confirmed whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can be done. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The first light emitting means is connected to a power line of a first voltage [for example, 24 V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line of a second voltage [for example, 5 V]. may be connected to The first light emitting means is provided on a first board [eg, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [eg, power supply control board 252B]. may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp and the second light emitting means may be a 7-segment display.

Also,
"The first light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control boards 300B and 156P, the first sub-control boards 400B and 160P, the power supply control boards 252B and 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine comprising a detachable harness [for example, a harness for supplying power of both 24V and 5V] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』
also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this amusement machine, it becomes easy to visually check the periphery of the substrate when the plurality of light emitting means emit light without the light projecting means.

Also,
"The first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [eg, main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first substrate and the movable body unit;
a detachable harness [for example, a harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit and the first substrate and the first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected normally.

Also,
``The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when it is energized [for example, always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to check the electrical connection in the energized state.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.]. Playground to play. 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means is also configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained. According to this amusement machine, it is confirmed whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by causing the current to flow through the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means respectively. becomes easier to do.

Also,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a second light-emitting means [e.g., power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] provided on a second board [e.g., power control board 252B];
Motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and movable bodies operable by driving the motors [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163 , sprockets, crews, etc.], and
A game machine comprising
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] that relays the movable body unit and the first substrate;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
with
wherein the motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the one harness;
wherein the motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first substrate and the second harness;
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

Also,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a movable body unit [eg, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] having a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m];
A game machine comprising
a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B];
a detachable first harness [e.g., harness MH2, harness MR12, MR22, MR33] that relays the movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180] and the relay board;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31] that relays the relay board and the first board;
with
The motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: ” was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, A movable body unit having a crew, etc.],
a door [e.g., front door 102];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
When the door is opened, the light emitting means and the movable body can be visually recognized [for example, FIG. 30(b) and FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, and the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. is
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operation means may be operable by relying on the light emitted from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place by emitting light from the light emitting means. good.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is invisible from the appearance of the gaming machine [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, since the illegitimate person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, it is possible to confirm by the light emitting means that the power from the power source is not normally supplied and attempt to attach the illegitimate device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)]. A platform [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. 』
also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. Further, the movable body unit may project from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable unit [eg, the reel unit 700] [eg, LEDs 24PL, 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. The light-emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a sitting posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls game effects [eg, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 400B', second sub-control board, effect control board],
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [eg, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The sub control board may perform control based on a command transmitted from the main control board (the same shall apply hereinafter).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The power supply device may supply power from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply), or may convert current supplied from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply) into a predetermined voltage. (same as below).

The power failure state may be a state in which power cannot be received from the outside of the gaming machine (commercial power source) (same below).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.] and motor [for example, motor 180 m, 110 m to 112 m, motor 163 m, dispensing motor, etc. A movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, effect movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
Certain printed indications [for example, the indication 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. ]and,
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches [for example, the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL', the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', and the light from Fig. 30 (b) , the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The position to which the light from the light emitting means reaches may be, in other words, a position illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be a position within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Alternatively, it may be a position where the light emitting means emits light even in a dark place so that it can be visually recognized (hereinafter the same).

The certain printed display is, for example, a display (for example, display by silk printing) relating to any one of substrate components such as connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, etc. management number (for example, a display printed on the resist layer of the substrate) (hereinafter the same).

It should be noted that a certain display (for example, display by stamping or display by handwriting) may be used instead of a certain print display.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] reaches [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The certain circuit components may be, for example, connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, etc. (same below).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A board case [for example, the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage cases 220 and 220', the case of the power supply device 252],
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] emits light from the light emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board housed therein, as well as the light shown in FIG. 30(b). , When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, the light from the LED 24ML provided in the main control board 300B housed in the main control board housing case 210 with a positional relationship of 90 degrees] reaches. A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by being provided at a position. 』
was also explained.

Management information such as the management number of the board may be displayed on the certain board case. For example, a sticker on which management information or the like is printed, management information is written, or a seal is displayed (for example, "board number 0001" affixed to the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 29 is displayed. 210S) is attached (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The certain substrate case may be the main control substrate storage case 210, the sub control substrate storage case 220, the first sub substrate case 162P, or the second sub substrate. It may be the case 165P, the payout board case 172P, the ejection board case 176P, or the power board case 184P (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The certain substrate case may be a translucent case (e.g., a transparent resin case) or a non-translucent case (e.g., a metal case (case of a power supply device). Good (same hereafter).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the harness [for example, the harness MH, the harnesses MR1 to MR3] [for example, the harness PM supplied via],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, a power supply device [for example, a power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [for example, commercial power] into a predetermined voltage is provided, and the current converted to a predetermined voltage in the power supply device is transferred to the harness [for example, a harness MH and harnesses MR1 to MR3] may be supplied to the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML]. According to this aspect, when the power is off, the motor can be manually driven to check whether the harness is connected or not by checking the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. It is possible to check whether or not the power is normally supplied separately from whether or not the harness is connected.

In addition, the movable unit [eg, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] can be removed from the gaming machine with the connector of the harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] unplugged. good too. When inspecting or cleaning the movable unit, the harness connector is unplugged before it is removed. Therefore, it is easy for the harness to be connected incorrectly or forgotten to be connected. It is possible to easily check whether or not connection is forgotten.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m] are connected via the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and first harnesses [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3]. is electrically connected to the
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM],
The light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] emits light even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness [eg, harness PM], the movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left The reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112] may be manually operated to drive the motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force generated by the motor may flow in, thereby emitting light. ,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the movable body is a reel.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a board];
Second light emitting means [for example, different LEDs (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or LEDs provided on a board different from a certain board (secondary control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', secondary control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
When the first light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by operating the movable body by hand in a power-off state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force flows in ( hereinafter referred to as "the first case"),
When the second light emitting means also emits light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
When at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [for example, a capacitor 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC continue to emit light due to the charge accumulated]
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The harness may be, for example, the harness MR1. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR1. Also, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the harness MR1 and the harness PM. and a harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED];
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor.
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different substrates [for example, different substrates such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 5V monitor LED 5PL];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
wherein the motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor.
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24 V and 5 V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a board];
Second light emitting means [for example, different LEDs (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or LEDs provided on a board different from a certain board (secondary control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', secondary control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. There is a case where light is emitted due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
The first light emitting means is configured to drive the third motor by operating the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state, and to generate a current (for example, an induced current) caused by a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"), and the second light emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the power cut state. and drive the third motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in, causing light emission (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case"). is a
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
When at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light even when the driving of the first motor is stopped in the first case and the second case [ For example, when light emission is continued by electric charges stored in capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC],
In the third case and the fourth case, even if the driving of the third motor stops, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [ For example, if the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC continue to emit light],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The first harness may be, for example, the harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, the motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR1. Also, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the harness MR1 and the harness PM. and a harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

The third harness may be, for example, the harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, the motor 112m. In this case, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR3. Also, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR3. That is, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the harness MR3, the harness PM and the harness PS1. and a harness PS2. Therefore, here too, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate, or may be provided on different substrates.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
second light emitting means [e.g., sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED], and a first motor [e.g., A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a motor 110m],
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means is configured to drive the third motor by operating the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state, and to generate a current (for example, an induced current) caused by a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The second light-emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the third motor [for example, an induced current ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different substrates [for example, different substrates such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 5V monitor LED 5PL];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means is configured to drive the third motor by operating the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state, and to generate a current (for example, an induced current) caused by a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The second light-emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the third motor [for example, an induced current ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24 V and 5 V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a door [e.g., front door 102];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
When the door is open, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body can be visually recognized [for example, FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, and the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. is
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operation means may be operable by relying on the light emitted from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place by emitting light from the light emitting means. good.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is invisible from the appearance of the gaming machine [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, since the illegitimate person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, it is possible to confirm by the light emitting means that the power from the power source is not normally supplied and attempt to attach the illegitimate device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)]. A platform [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. 』
also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. Further, the movable body unit may project from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable unit [eg, the reel unit 700] [eg, LEDs 24PL, 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit.

The light-emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a sitting posture. According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls game effects [eg, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 400B', second sub-control board, effect control board],
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [eg, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
Certain printed indications [for example, the indication 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. ]and,
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches (Fig. 30(b))],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

It should be noted that a certain display (for example, display by stamping or display by handwriting) may be used instead of a certain print display.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] reaches [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A board case [for example, the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage cases 220 and 220', the case of the power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
In addition to the light from the light emitting means [for example, the light from the LED provided on the board housed in the certain substrate case, the front door 102 shown in FIG. In the open state, the light from the LED 24ML provided in the main control board 300B housed in the main control board housing case 210 which has a positional relationship of 90 degrees] reaches.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the first harness [for example, harness MR1] [for example, via harness PM supplied],
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the third harness [for example, harness MR3] [for example, via harness PM supplied],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [for example, harness PM], and the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML]. can operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor even if there is a connection failure in the second harness [for example, the harness PM]. It may emit light when electric current (e.g., induced current) flows into it,
The light emitting means operates the third movable body by hand to drive the third motor even if the second harness [for example, the harness PM] has a connection failure, and the third motor causes the third motor to operate. It may emit light due to the inflow of current [e.g., induced current] due to the generated back electromotive force,
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel, and the third movable body may be a third reel.

33 to 67, a game table (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 33 to 67 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 67, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 33 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

34, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the figure) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting section and a light receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The active line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. It will be judged as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 34 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1 (BB1), a special combination 2 (BB2), replay combinations 1 to 3, and small combinations 1 to 7 (eg, watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a three-coin bet. However, the game can also be played with a two-coin bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing a 3-bet game in the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is more advantageous for the player than performing a 2-bet game in the 3-bet bonus internal winning state. The bonus internal winning state is set as a normal game state, and the game is played with three bets as much as possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 35(a)) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. A top lamp 144T provided on the top of the front door 102, a left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The rendering device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a rendering image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

35 shows the internal structure of the slot machine 100. FIG. 35(a) is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened, and FIG. It is the figure which expanded the door relay board|substrate 290 arrange|positioned.

The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, a reel unit 700 with three reels 110-112 is arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement arcade) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. By operating the first selection switch 190, the value of the sound output from the bass speaker 277 or the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, effect sound, error sound, etc.) can be changed, or the power saving mode can be set. can be set. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device. The external collective terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the game mode (also referred to as set value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed set value. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, which will be described in detail later. , includes a value (“payout rate”) for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine. This set value can be set in a plurality of stages, for example, in six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting a predetermined setting key (not shown) and turning it. Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned right, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when the setting key switch 281 is turned left, the setting key switch sensor is detected. Detect off state.

Since the setting key switch 281 is also provided inside the main body 101 like the first selection switch 190 described above, it can be operated only by a person who can unlock the front door 102. .

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Further, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch ON signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external common terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). be done.

Note that the setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket 181) is arranged on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, there is a power supply having a power supply control board. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252 . Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply 252 . With this power switch 244, the slot machine 100 can be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on the power control board. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

On the right side of the hopper unit 180, an auxiliary medal storage box 240 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180 is arranged, behind which an overflow terminal is arranged (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a return path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal tray 161. there is This medal selector 170 will be further described later. A bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 . An open sensor 294 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 102 . The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is arranged below the design display window 113 on the rear surface of the front door 102 . This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a set value display 293, as shown in FIG. 35(b). The reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 can also be operated only by those who can unlock the front door 102, like the setting key switch 281 and the like.

The reset switch 291 is a push-button type switch, and by pressing (short-term pressing) the reset switch 291, the error of the slot machine 100 can be canceled. Further, by pressing the reset switch 291 for a long time (pressing for a long time), the RAM of the main control unit can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291 . An operation procedure for changing the setting value by using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. The set value display 293 can display a display representing the game mode (set value) set by the setting change button 292 .

Although the reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 are provided on the door relay board 290, they may be provided on the main control board 300B. Also, the set value display 293 may be provided on the main control board 300B.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 36 schematically shows the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in FIG. 35 are indicated by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in the medal passage 171 . The medal blocker 172 distributes the medals inserted from the medal slot 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266 . The medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 36 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the protruding medal blocker 172 to pass through the return passage 266. It is discharged from the medal payout port 155 . On the other hand, if the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 , the medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181 . Projection of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and retraction from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an actuation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) to guide the inserted medals to the storage passage 173 . On the other hand, when the activation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medals to the discharge passage 19b. FIG. 37(a) is a table showing the display order of the set values displayed on the set value display 293. FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, six types of setting values are prepared, namely setting 1, setting 2, setting 4 to setting 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293 . That is, immediately after shipment from the factory, after clearing the RAM containing the storage area for storing the set values (RAM of the main control unit), or when the backup power supply for continuing the storage of the storage area for storing the set values is lost, the default set values is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player's profit acquisition is higher in setting 2 than in setting 1, higher in setting 4 than in setting 2, higher in setting 5 than in setting 4, and higher in setting 6 than in setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player's gain.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, setting b is provided in place of setting 3. FIG. Setting b is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of profit acquisition for the player. That is, the setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player's gain. In the display of the 7-segment LED, this setting b has a display that differs from setting 6 by only one segment, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If the unauthorized person thinks that the setting displayed last is the most advantageous setting and performs an unauthorized operation, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the unauthorized person misunderstands setting 6 and sets it. The setting may be changed to b. In this case, the dishonest person can be disadvantaged.

When changing the setting, the display of the setting value display 293 is updated as 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2 . . . by operating the setting change button 292 . The display order other than "setting 1" which is displayed first may be any order. 2 . . . may be updated.

FIG. 37(b) is a table summarizing the difference in performance for each set value.

Performance A is payout rate (sometimes referred to as ball output rate), performance B is special role (BB) first hit probability, performance C is AT (assist time) first hit probability, performance D is AT continuation probability, Performance E is the expected number of AT wins, Performance F is the probability of a small win A (eg watermelon), Performance G is the frequency and probability of appearance of a notification that suggests a setting value (setting suggestion notification), Performance H is a setting suggestion as a fixed notification. It becomes the appearance frequency/appearance probability of the notification. The performances A to F correspond to the performances representing the degree of advantage in gaining profits for the player, and have the relationship of setting b<setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 as described above. .

In the performance G setting suggestion notification, the notification suggesting the currently set setting value is the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the bass speaker 277, and the like. This is performed using the upper speaker 272 or the like. The setting suggestion notification here includes not only a notification such as simply extinguishing a lamp or outputting a warning sound, but also a setting suggestion effect such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. be In addition, suggesting a set value also includes a case of suggesting a false set value (setting-related effect, setting-related notification). Furthermore, the suggestion of a set value also includes the case of notifying that a certain set value is 100% true (notification of setting confirmation). When the setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off when the demonstration animation (demonstration animation) in the effect image display device 157 is started. , the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up. The demonstration animation is started when a predetermined time elapses without inserting medals (betting operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (turned on) while no betting operations are being performed at the time of the power outage, the demo animation will start, but if the setting change is started, the demo animation will be displayed after the setting change is completed. is started. At the end of the chance zone, the end of the battle effect, the end of the BB, and the end of the AT, the setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in the state where the setting b is set. On the other hand, when setting values other than the setting b are set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where the setting b is set, the setting b confirmation notification may be performed once in a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). It should be noted that in a state in which the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification that the setting may be set b may not be performed, and only the setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when the setting b is set, the notification mode may include content suggesting that the player is disadvantaged (for example, text display or voice output such as "The tough battle will continue"). . The execution probability (appearance frequency) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) described above is set when setting b is set, and when setting values other than setting b (settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) are set. state, and approximately the same among settings other than setting b.

For performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is indicated as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmation notification not suggesting settings 1, 2, 4 to 6), and setting other than setting b is performed. In the state in which the set value of is set, a notification suggesting a set value other than the set value may also be performed as the setting suggestion notification. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd-number confirmation notification indicates that the setting of an odd-numbered setting value is confirmed. When setting 2 is set, an even-numbered setting value is set. There is an even confirmation notification that notifies that what is done is confirmed. In addition, in the state where setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification for notifying that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, a setting of 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. A setting 2 or more determination notification indicating that the setting value of 5 or more is confirmed, and a setting 5 or more determination notification indicating that the setting value of 5 or more is confirmed. In the state where the setting 6 is set, the effect of notifying only the setting 6 as the setting suggestion notification (the setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a probability lower than the execution probability of the setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (appearance frequency) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) described above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set Next higher (e.g., 50%), the states where the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, 5) are set have approximately the same probability of execution (e.g., 30%) than the state where setting 6 is set. %).

FIGS. 37(c) to 37(f) show setting-related notifications using the effect image display device 157 ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). The setting-related notification here is a kind of notification effect.

FIG. 37(c) is a diagram showing an example of an even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(c), the character "May be set even" is displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "may be even number setting" suggests that the set value is likely to be 2, 4 or 6 (even number setting). In addition, this even-number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even-number setting, or may be performed when the setting value is a setting other than an even-number setting (odd-number setting). may In this case, the setting value may be more likely to be notified when the even number setting is used than when the odd number setting is used.

FIG. 37(d) is a diagram showing an example of notification suggesting a setting of 5 or more. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(d), the character "I want to eat five or more sugar canes" is displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "I want to eat five or more sugar canes" suggests that the set value is likely to be 5 or 6. Note that the setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be performed only when the set value is 5 or 6, or may be performed when the set value is 4 or less. In this case, the set value may be set to be easier to notify when the set value is 5 or 6 than when the set value is 4 or less. Note that when the set value is 4 or less, the setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 37(e) is a diagram showing an example of notification of confirmation of setting 2 or more. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(e), first of all, the characters "Ah, business sorting" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The character itself, "Ah, it's a business sorting", corresponds to a notification suggesting setting 2 or higher. After that, an old woman character BBA appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and business sorting is performed. BBA, the character of the old woman, is displayed with characters such as ``Isn't it good if it's 1? The notification by this dialogue denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. Note that the confirmation notification of the setting of 2 or more may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed when the setting is 1 as well. Alternatively, in the case of setting 1, the old woman character BBA may not appear.

FIG. 37(f) is a diagram showing an example of setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(f), first of all, the characters "Oh, God's revelation" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character "Ah, God's revelation" itself corresponds to the notification suggesting the setting b. After that, a divine character KGG appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and a revelation is issued. The god's character KGG is displayed with the message "A tough battle will continue" as a revelation. The notification by this notification is a notification that confirms that the setting is b. Note that the setting b confirmation notification is performed only when the setting is b, and is not performed in the case of other set values. However, in the case of setting values other than the setting b, the character PND of the panda and the character "Oh, God's revelation" may be displayed, and the character KGG of the god may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given assuming that the setting suggestion notification includes the setting suggestion effect, and the setting confirmation notification includes the setting confirmation effect, but the setting suggestion notification may be read as the setting suggestion effect, and the setting confirmation notification may be set. You may read it as a fixed production.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed numerically, it can be used to confirm the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value. When the setting key switch 281 is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be described. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF→ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cutoff state (power OFF) to the power ON state (power ON). The setting value change becomes valid (the setting value changing process is started), and the game mode (setting value) changes from 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2→· every time the setting change button 292 is pressed. , and the desired game mode can be selected. By operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value changing process is completed.

The period of the set value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise turn of the setting key to the last counterclockwise turn of the set value change operation is called the set value change mode. , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode. The start and end of setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the conditions for starting and ending the setting value change mode and setting value confirmation mode described in detail with reference to FIG. 3 may be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section consisting of the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the presentation of the game.

<Main control part>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a left reel 110 sensor. index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving a motor provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 for driving a blocker solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (the effective line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121 , the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 35). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-controller 400 . An upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are installed in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected. there is

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163 . The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquired points command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents. In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, details of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in the main controller main process of FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, processes such as setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308, etc. are performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main controller initial setting process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, the values of the set values are erased.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or momentary power failure (temporary voltage drop below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 40). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, it determines whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal. It is judged that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when power is cut off, and the stack Set the pointer again (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power failure. Furthermore, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT, game state, and effect state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data in the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1013, which is followed when the setting key switch 281 is ON in step S1005, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main controller initial setting process of FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the value of the set value.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40), and the process proceeds to step S1105. As a result, a setting changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during setting change, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. A provisional set value is displayed on the set value display 293 by the processing here. After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1111, the provisional set value is updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed once, the temporary setting values are updated one by one according to the display order described with reference to FIG. is operated, the temporary set value is set to 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of confirming the temporary set value as a set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117. That is, the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135 . When the set value is determined, the set value display 293 displays a display indicating that the set value has been determined (here, number 0). When the setting value is determined, the setting value display 293 may continue to display the determined setting value, may switch to blinking display, or may not be displayed.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned counterclockwise 90 degrees and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119; otherwise, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40) is executed. As a result, the effect image display device 157 ends the display of the display during setting change. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

42, the opening/closing state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed as the termination condition. good too. Further, although the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135, the set value may be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281. FIG.

Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 43(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 43(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, processing such as initialization of input/output ports and initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 408 is performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Note that the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Further, if backup is performed at the time of power failure, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 43(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 44(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 44(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 44(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 44(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input/output port initialization and initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 508 are performed. It should be noted that, if the backup has been performed at the time of power failure, the information backed up in this step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 44(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, setting changes in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 will be described. The setting change process is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG.

FIG. 45 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting the setting b by changing the setting and the state of the related components. In FIG. 45, each stage is labeled from (a) to (b), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. Also, FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG.

FIG. 45 shows, as items of components, a power switch 244, a front door 102, an open sensor 294, a setting key switch 281, a set value display 293, an effect image display device 157, a title panel lamp 164, a top lamp 144T, a left Items of side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker) are shown. 46 schematically shows a set value display 293, effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and speakers (272, 277). It is

In FIG. 45(a), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. A setting key is not inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set values are not displayed. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also turned off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Figure 30
In 05 (a) and (b), various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown in plain white with no pattern (the same applies hereinafter).

In FIG. 45(a), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Since the power has not yet been turned on, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal even if the front door 102 is opened.

In FIG. 45C, the power switch 244 is turned on while the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state (power-on). As a result, the open sensor 294 begins to output a detection signal for open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. In FIG. 46(c), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is illuminated in white is represented by left-downward hatching (the same applies hereinafter). As described above, the setting change processing in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244 . . When the setting change process is started, the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. Further, when the setting change process is started, the effect image display device 157 displays a setting changing display to inform that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also indicates that the setting is being changed. A voice (“Changing settings”) will be output to notify you of this.

In FIG. 45(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the set value display 293 displays "2" as the temporary set value.

In FIG. 45(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and the set value display 293 displays "4" as the temporary set value.

In FIG. 45(f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the set value display 293 displays "5" as the temporary set value.

In FIG. 45(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, setting 6 is displayed as a temporary setting value on the setting value display 293, and in FIG. It is pressed, and "b" is displayed on the set value display 293 as a temporary set value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 46(g) with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. A fraudulent person who tries to change the number to , may mistake the display of "b" for the display of "6".

In FIG. 45(vi), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value is determined. Here, the setting b is fixed. Incidentally, when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Alternatively, the set value may be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281 instead of determining the set value by operating the start lever 135 .

In FIG. 45(J), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process is completed (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the 7 segments of the set value display 293 are extinguished. Also, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation. When the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the power is turned on, the display of the demonstration animation starts immediately after the power is turned on. is started after the In this case, the display of the demonstration animation starts from the beginning. Alternatively, the display of the demo animation was played immediately after the power was turned on, but the setting change display overlapped and could not be seen. good. Also, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the sound "The door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 46(J), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern, which is indicated by grid-like hatching (same below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit during the setting change, but is turned off when the setting change is completed, and remains in the off state until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . The extinguishing of the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the set value, more specifically, notification that the set value is set to a certain set value (the most disadvantageous set value for the player). In addition, since the title panel lamp 164 normally remains lit, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be regarded as notification of an abnormality (notification of an abnormality in the set value).

In FIG. 45 (S), the front door 102 is closed, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound "The door is closed". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 45 (ch), medals are inserted. That is, the maintenance of the medals or the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 are performed. As a result, from the speakers (272, 277),
A medal insertion sound is output, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the demonstration animation to the normal effect background display (normal background display). Further, among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the lighting pattern for normal effect (normal pattern). In FIG. 46(b), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a normal pattern, which is indicated by cross hatching (same below). On the other hand, the title panel lamp 164, which has continued to be turned off, also starts lighting up. The title panel lamp 164 may start lighting when the front door 102 is closed, may continue to turn off when the medal is inserted, and may start lighting when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135). It may start lighting at the third stop of the game, or may start lighting at the completion of the payout of the first game.

FIG. 47(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed while the setting value is set to the setting b. In FIG. 47(a), each stage is labeled from (t) to (n), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. Also, FIG. 48 schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (T) to (N) in FIG. 47(a).

In FIG. 47(a), the same items as in FIG. 45 are shown as the items of the constituent elements, and in FIG. 48(a), each constituent element is schematically shown in the same manner as in FIG.

FIG. 47 (T) may be a continuation from FIG. 45 (T), and the game has already started with the setting b. For example, the game is started while ignoring the notification that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. In FIG. 47 (T), the third stop is performed, and reel stop sounds are output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 47(h), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses without the insertion of medals after the third stop. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are switched from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if the setting b remains set, when the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is restored. It should be noted that the title panel lamp 164 may be extinguished and the setting-related notification may be started when a wide demonstration effect is started or when the demonstration state is entered, not limited to the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. .

In FIG. 47(j), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start door open pattern lighting. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which has been turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door opening pattern. In FIG. 48(T), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in the door open pattern, and are indicated by hatching downward to the right (same below). These lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern indicated by cross hatching in FIG. Since the front door 102 is opened, there is a possibility that the setting will be changed, so the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. From the speakers (272, 277), the sound "The door is open" begins to be output. The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, but it is also possible to display the characters "door open" along with the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 47(T), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses without the setting being changed after the front door 102 is opened. In order to change the settings, the power switch 244 must be turned off and the setting key switch 281 must be turned on. If not, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again and the setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the setting. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from the door opening pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is terminated, and the lighting of the demonstration pattern is restored.

In FIG. 47(g), the front door 102 is closed. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switches to the L level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound "The door is closed". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also continue to light up in the demonstration pattern. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification is continued.

In FIG. 47(na), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG.

In FIG. 47(2), the front door 102 is closed again 1 second after the opening of the front door 102 in FIG. 47(na). The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 . At the speakers (272, 277), the voice "the door is open" is immediately switched to the voice "the door is closed". On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue the door open pattern lighting for the predetermined time after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by extinguishing the title panel lamp 164 does not start until the predetermined time has passed since the front door 102 was opened. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 47(J), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 in FIG. 47(N) was opened. Again, as a result, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 was opened without the setting being changed, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and setting-related notification is started. . In addition, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from door open pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. FIG. The title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. 47(J) because the front door 102 is closed while the setting is set to b, and medals are not inserted until the predetermined time elapses. It can also be seen that the setting-related notification has started by turning off the lamp 164, and if medals are inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started.

In the example shown in FIG. 47(a) described above, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished when the demo animation is started with the setting value set to the setting b (FIG. 47(h)). The title panel lamp 164 may be turned off under certain conditions, for example, when entering a non-recommended game state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, without following a specific pressing order navigation) After releasing the third stop button), the title panel lamp may be turned off. In the non-recommended game state, no lottery including the AT lottery is performed, and the number of medals for the player remains the same or slightly reduced, but the non-recommended game state continues until the predetermined number of medals is paid out. Therefore, it will take a considerable amount of time to return to a state where the number of medals can be increased. When entering the non-recommended gaming state, the effect image display device 157 may perform a suggestive display suggesting that the non-recommended gaming state is reached. It may be continuously displayed until the penalty bonus ends). Also, in the non-recommended game state, the demonstration animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain turned off during the game and during the non-game. It should be noted that regardless of the set value (other than the setting b) it may enter the non-recommended game state, or the non-recommended game state may be entered only when the set value is set to the setting b. may

FIG. 47(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the setting value is set to the setting b. In FIG. 47(b), the checkout button 134 is operated at the timing of (ne) after one second from (t), starting from (t) in the same state as (t) shown in FIG. 47(a). . That is, the settlement operation is performed before the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses without medals being inserted after the third stop is performed. When the settlement operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation. Further, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the settlement pattern. Furthermore, a game medium payout sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, FIG. 207(n) schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in FIG. 47(n). In FIG. 48(N), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are hatched with horizontal lines to indicate that they are lit according to the settlement pattern (the same applies hereinafter). These lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern indicated by cross hatching in FIG.

In FIG. 47(no), the payout of game media is completed. FIG. 48(n) schematically shows the components in FIG. 47(n). Even after the payout is completed, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from the adjustment pattern lighting to the demonstration pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. FIG. Output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for extinguishing the title panel lamp 164 described above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off while the setting b is set ((C) in FIG. 45), the setting b is set. When the demonstration animation starts with (Fig. 47 (H), the result is the same in Fig. 45 (J)), when the payout according to the payment operation is completed with the setting b set ( FIG. 47(f)) can be mentioned.

FIG. 49(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state where setting 1, which is the default setting value, is set. In FIG. 49(a), each stage is labeled from (c) to (f), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, the upper part of FIG. 50 schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (c) to (f) in FIG. 49(a). (C) in FIG. 49A is the same as (T) shown in FIG. 47A, 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened. is not set to the setting b, the title panel lamp 164 is not turned off and remains lit in white. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is not illuminated in the demo pattern, but may be illuminated in white, in which case the demo pattern is illuminated. In FIG. 50(C), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by left-downward hatching.

In (H) in FIG. 49(a), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started. The set value display 293 displays "1" as the current set value. In addition, on the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a voice (“Confirming settings”) to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 continues to illuminate in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from demo pattern lighting to white lighting. The set value display 293 shown in FIG. 50(H) displays "1" which is the current set value. Further, all of the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 50(H) are lit in white.

(f) in FIG. 49(a) is the same state as (j) shown in FIG. 47(a), in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off. The point at which confirmation is completed and the point at which the title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white without being extinguished because the set value is not set to the setting b. In FIG. 50(f), the set value display 293 is hidden. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) have a demonstration pattern represented by grid-like hatching. switched to lighting.

(F) in FIG. 49(a) is the same state as (S) shown in FIG. 47(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. It becomes a point that continues to light up in white.

FIG. 49(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting is checked in the power saving mode in the state where setting 1 is set. In FIG. 49(b), each stage is labeled from (ka) to (ke), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (1) to (1) in FIG. 49(b).

Fig. 49(b) shows a state 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened, which is the same as (c) shown in Fig. 49(a). Street. First, the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (lights are reduced) than in the non-power saving mode, as described with reference to FIG. 17(h). Also, the title panel lamp 164 is the same in that it continues to light in white without being extinguished, but the luminance is lowered (dimmed). On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off by setting the power saving mode. FIG. 50(f) shows that the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is darkened and the title panel lamp 164 is also darkened. It also shows that the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

In FIG. 49(b), similarly to (h) shown in FIG. 49(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started. . Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights are not dimmed or turned off while the settings are being checked, and the lighting is the same as in the non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 50(K) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG. 50(H).

In (c) of FIG. 49(b), similarly to (f) shown in FIG. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demonstration animation is started is darkened, and the title panel lamp 164 is also darkened. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

FIG. 49(b) (v) is the same state as (f) shown in FIG. 49(a), with the front door 102 closed. The effect image display device 157 and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change from the previous state in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off.

FIG. 51(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state set in setting b. In FIG. 51(a), time elapses in the order of (te), (b), (co), and (sa).

(te) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (te) shown in FIG. 47(a), 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened, and is exactly the same state as (te). That is, the set value display 293 is not displayed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the demonstration animation. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a demo pattern.

In (b) of FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started. 49(a), the only difference is the set value displayed on the set value display 293. FIG. That is, in (b) in FIG. 51(a), the set value display 293 displays the current set value “b”. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 52B displays "b" which is the current setting value. As in FIG. 50(H), in FIG. 52(B) as well, the setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed." It is The title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(J) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (J) shown in FIG. 45, in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off, which is exactly the same state as (J). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished, and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (Sa) shown in FIG. 45 where the front door 102 is closed, which is exactly the same as (Sa). That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 51(b) is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the settings are checked in the power saving mode with the settings set to b. In FIG. 51(b), each stage is assigned a code from (ga) to (ge), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (ga) to (ge) in FIG. 51(b).

(ga) in FIG. 51(b) is the same state as (te) shown in FIG. 51(a), 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened. Street. First, the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (lights are reduced) than in the non-power saving mode. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off by setting the power saving mode. FIG. 52(G) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is darkened. It should be noted that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 51(b), similarly to (b) shown at (a) in FIG. , and (b) are exactly the same. That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights are not dimmed or extinguished while the setting is being checked, and the operation is the same as in the non-power saving mode. It should be noted that the contents of the display of the set value display 293 and the like are different from (4) in FIG. 49(b). That is, "b" is displayed like the set value display 293 shown in FIG.

In (g) in FIG. 51(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off as in (j) in FIG. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demonstration animation is started is dark, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (c) in FIG. 49(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is executed as shown in FIG.

(B) in FIG. 51(b) is the same state as (X) shown in FIG. 51(a), with the front door 102 closed. The effect image display device 157 and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change from the previous state in which the setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, a modified example of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 will be described.

<Regarding the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, examples of the winning probability and state transition of the winning hand group are shown, and the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate considering all hands including replays which are replay hands and the real payout rate considering hands other than replays. A slot machine capable of converging the payout rate within a suitable range by devising will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine according to this modified example, as states that can be controlled according to the progress of the game, a first state (RT2 described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as described later, and a , and a second situation (RT1, which will be described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate, so that the payout rate converges within a suitable range. can be made It is assumed that the slot machine in this modified example also has the technical matters described with reference to FIGS. Here, the payout rate refers to the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out after the symbols corresponding to the minor win are stopped by the total number of medals bet set as the bet number. . In addition, the total payout rate considering all the combinations is, for example, when winning a replay in a game in which three bets are made, three medals are paid out due to the winning replay, and three medals are betted in the next game. means the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as the first payout rate. On the other hand, the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replays is, for example, when a replay win is made in a game with a 3-bet bet, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. It means a payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a coin is betted.

FIG. 53(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example. In the slot machine according to this modification, RT0, which is a basic game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is completed, or a state in which a setting change is triggered, etc.), and a predetermined The game state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT1 which is shifted by winning a transitional combination A and RT2 which is shifted by winning a predetermined transitional combination B in RT0. In RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting the number of bets to be three. After shifting to RT1 or RT2, the game is shifted to RT0 again by completing 100 games defined as the prescribed number of games. At RT0 in the slot machine according to this modified example, in addition to the transitional hand A and the transitional hand B, a bonus hand, a replay hand, a small hand, etc. are selected by lottery to determine whether or not they will be won. It is determined to be In addition, in the slot machine according to this modified example, if a bonus combination is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the transition is made to a bonus state in which the payout rate is 1 or more. It is omitted from a). It should be noted that the slot machine in this modified example may transition the game state between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 53(b) is a diagram for explaining part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery in RT1 and the level of the winning probability. In RT1, a bonus combination, a replay combination including replay a and replay b, a small combination including a 3-card combination with a 3-card payout, and a push-up combination with a 15-card payout, etc. are the targets of the role lottery. It is defined. The 3-card combination always wins in the winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, the pushing order combination wins when operated in a predetermined pushing order (equivalent to the above-described advantageous operation mode) and 15 coins are paid out, but does not win when operated in a predetermined pushing order (other than that). It may be a winning combination (for example, a single winning combination).

The winning probability of the bonus combination is determined to be 1/250 when the set values are 'b', '1' and '2', and 1/200 when the set values are '4' to '6'. is determined to be For this reason, the winning probability of the bonus combination in RT1 is set in two stages: setting values "b", "1" and "2" and setting values "4" to "6". there is In addition, the winning probability of the replay b among the replaying hands is determined to be low (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the set value, while the winning probability of the winning hand among the small winnings is , is determined to be a high probability (for example, 60/200) regardless of the set value. It should be noted that even if the player wins the first prize in RT1, the navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the advantageous operation mode is not executed (that is, it is not controlled by the AT). Therefore, even if the player wins the winning role, for example, the player wins with a probability of 1/6 and does not win with a probability of 5/6.

On the other hand, with regard to the winning probability of Replay a among the replaying roles and the winning probability of the 3-card role among the small roles, the total winning probability is set to be uniform (for example, 50/200). , the ratio of the winning probability of the replay a and the three-card combination is determined to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are "b" and "6", the replay a has a low probability (eg, 15/200), while the 3-card combination has a high probability (eg, 35/200). It is determined to be When the set values are "1" and "5", both the replay a and the 3-card combination are determined to have medium probabilities (for example, 25/200). When the set values are "2" and "4", the replay a has a high probability (eg, 35/200), while the 3-card hand has a low probability (eg, 15/200). ing.

FIG. 53(c) is a diagram for explaining a part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery and the level of the winning probability in RT2. In RT2, as in RT1, bonus hands, replay hands including replay a and replay b, etc., 3-card hands with 3-card payouts, small wins including 15-card payouts, etc. are subject to lottery. is determined to be The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is determined to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other hands is the same as in RT1. It is determined to be Further, when winning the pushing order in RT2, unlike in RT1, a navigation effect is executed that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode. Therefore, when winning the winning combination in RT2, 15 medals will be paid out by winning the winning combination unless the operation mode is mistaken. Note that the winning combination to be drawn in RT2 is not limited to being determined in the same way as in RT1, and may be determined differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the combined winning probability of replay a and 3-card combination (also the combined winning probability because winning is guaranteed) is uniform regardless of the set value. However, if the total payout rate and the actual payout rate are compared, they differ for each set value. For example, when the set values are "b" and "6", the winning/winning probability of replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the set value " When the set values are 1 and 5, the difference is relatively large, and when the set values are 2 and 4, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximum. Moreover, in any of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, which affect the probability of winning the bonus combination, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate becomes relatively small. It is determined so as to include a set value at which the difference from the actual payout rate is relatively large and a set value at which the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximized.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is 3, and FIG. 54 illustrates a case where the bonus combination is not won in RT1 and RT2. The probability of winning the replay during RT1 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set is 10/100 (=(15+5)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 10 prizes in between. For this reason, in FIG. 54(a), when the replay wins 10 times in 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set, " Examples of total IN number, actual IN number, total OUT number, and actual OUT number are shown, and real payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. Note that "total number of wins" and "actual number of wins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but "total number of wins" is the number of medals including the number of bets automatically set after winning a replay. On the other hand, the "actual IN number" is the number excluding the number of bets automatically set after the replay win (the number of bets after the replay win is set to "0"). In addition, "total number of out" and "actual number of out" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a minor role, but "total number of out" means that 3 medals were paid out when winning a replay. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number that is assumed to be 0 at the time of winning the replay.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), if 10 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "270" (=300 sheets - 10 times x 3 sheets). Also, the "total number of OUT sheets" is assumed to be "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (=150-10 times×3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 0.444 (≈120/270), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150/300).

Next, FIG.54(b) is demonstrated. The probability of winning the replay during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 20/100 (=(35+5)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 20 prizes in between. For this reason, in FIG. 54(b), when the replay wins 20 times in 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set, " Examples of total IN number, actual IN number, total OUT number, and actual OUT number are shown, and real payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 54(b), if 20 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "240" (=300 sheets - 20 times x 3 sheets). Also, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the total probability of replay a and 3-card hand is uniform, so the "total number of OUT" is assumed to be "150" as in FIG. 54(a). , the “substantial number of OUT sheets” in this case is “90” (=150−20 times×3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 0.375 (=90/240), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150/300).

As described above, during RT1, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate. 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN" and the "total number of OUT" are the same as in FIG. 54(a), etc., because the total probability of the number of games played, replay a, and 3-card hand is uniform. Also, the number of replay wins, the "substantial IN number" and the "substantial OUT number" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b). Therefore, the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate for 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set. Become. In addition, during RT1, although the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the set value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous to the player. state can be

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate varies depending on the set value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value (regardless of the set value). is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning the replay during RT2 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set is 30/100 (=(15+45)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 30 prizes in between. In FIG. 54(c), the "total IN number , "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "real OUT number" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 54(c), when 30 replays are won in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "210" (=300 sheets - 30 times x 3 sheets). Also, the "total number of out" is assumed to be "600" as a result of the navigation effect, and the "actual number of out" in this case is "510" (=600-30 times×3). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.429 (≈510/210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600/300).

Next, FIG.54(d) is demonstrated. During RT2, the probability of winning the replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 40/100 (=(35+45)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 40 times in between. In FIG. 54(d), when the replay wins 40 times in 100 games (G) when the set value is set to either "2" or "4" during RT2, the "total IN number , "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "real OUT number" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 54(d), if the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "180" (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). Also, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the total probability of replay a and the 3-card hand is uniform, so the "total number of out" is assumed to be "600" as in FIG. 54(c). , the “substantial number of OUT sheets” in this case is “480” (=600−40 times×3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.667 (≈480/180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600/300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate differs depending on the set value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even at the set value of . Note that the 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN" and "total number of OUT" are the same as in FIG. Also, the number of replay wins, the "substantial IN number" and the "substantial OUT number" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 54(d). From this, it can be said that the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set. Become. In addition, during RT2, even though the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. state can be

As described above, in the slot machine according to this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, attention is paid to the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all hands including replays and the actual payout rate that takes into account hands other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 54(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range, compared to a gaming machine in which only one payout rate is high.

The transition from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined winning combination such as the transition winning combination A, but the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, the completion of a predetermined number of games, or the winning of a predetermined lottery. It may be established by such things as. In addition, the shift from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined winning combination such as the transition winning combination B, but the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, completion of a predetermined number of games, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may be established by such things as. In addition, the timing of transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the fact that the game is completed a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined role, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, and the winning of a predetermined lottery. It may be established by doing. In addition, the transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to being established by completing the game a predetermined number of times. It may be established by doing.

In addition, the transitional combination A wins simultaneously with other winnings a, b, etc. in the combination lottery, and the operation mode of winning the transitional combination A according to the type of the other combination in which the transitional combination A is simultaneously won (for example, The pressing order) may be determined differently. Also, the transitional hand B is won at the same time as the other hand a, b, etc. in the hand lottery, and the transitional hand B is won according to the type of the other hand in which the transitional hand B is simultaneously won (for example, The pressing order) may be determined differently. In addition, the transition winning combination A, the transition winning combination B, and the other winning combinations a and b are simultaneously won in the winning combination lottery, and the transition winning combination A is won according to the types of other winning combinations simultaneously won. , and transitional combination B may be determined differently. In this case, when the transition winning combination A or the transition winning combination B is won at RT0, by generating a pushing order guessing game, the interest in the game at RT0 can be improved.

For example, the transition role A is an RT1 transition replay, and the other normal replay a, normal replay b, and other normal replays are simultaneously won in the lottery, and the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won according to the type of other normal replays. may be determined to be different in operation mode (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are provided a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. Reel control is performed to win the RT1 transition replay by the first left stop at the time of a, while reel control to win the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left. , reel control for winning the RT1 transition replay is performed by the first stop other than the left in the winning situation b, while reel control for winning the normal replay b is performed by the first stop on the left. can be

In addition, the transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, and the other normal replay a, normal replay b, and other normal replays are simultaneously won in the lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won according to the type of other normal replays. may be determined to be different in operation mode (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are provided a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. While the reel control for winning the RT2 transition replay is performed by the left first stop at c, the reel control for winning the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left. , reel control is performed to win the RT2 transition replay by first stopping other than the left in the winning situation d, while reel control is performed to win the normal replay b by making the left first stop. can be

At RT0 in this case, by notifying that it is a push order guessing game when one of the winning situations a to d occurs (for example, when winning situations a and b, "Pinch! Avoid pushing order!" display a message, and display a message such as ``Chance! Make the correct answer on your own!'' in winning situations c and d, etc.), thereby providing the player with the amusement that makes him think about which pressing order to perform the stop operation. , RT0 can be improved.

FIG. 53(a) exemplifies the game state transition between RT0 and RT2. Focusing on this, if a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur as shown in FIG. is not limited to

53(b) and 53(c), when the total payout rate and the real payout rate are compared, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs for each set value. Also, in any of the set values "b", "1", "2" and the set values "4" to "6" that affect the probability of winning the bonus combination, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is It has been explained that there are a relatively small set value, a set value with a relatively large difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate, and a set value with the maximum difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate. However, as shown in FIG. 54(e), the winning probability is such that a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur. If a lottery is performed (for example, the winning probability of replay is not set to 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. And it is not limited to the winning combination and winning probability of the winning combination lottery shown in FIG. 53(c) and the like.

To summarize the features of the slot machine according to the modified example described above,
"A gaming machine that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, and can provide game values according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped,
Determining whether or not any of a plurality of roles including a granting role accompanying the awarding of the game value and a re-playing role enabling the next game to be started without newly using the game value is won. A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
Stop control means for performing stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning lottery;
setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total awarded number, which is the total number of game values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the award combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the bet number, In a game played with a predetermined number of bets set, when the symbol corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped, the predetermined number of game values is given as a result of the game, and the number of bets is set in the next game. A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets. The gaming value given in the next game is set to 0, and the gaming value set as the bet number in the next game is counted as 0. The second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate. A first situation in which the rate is higher and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate,
In the notification state for notifying the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination by the combination lottery, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of any set value among the plurality of types of set values. becomes high, and in the non-notification state in which the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination by the combination lottery is not notified, the first is higher than the payout rate of
At least a first set value with the most advantageous degree of advantage and a second set value with the most unfavorable degree of advantage are provided as the plurality of types of set values, and the second set value is set. The ratio of the first situation is higher when the first set value is set, and the second set value is set more than when the first set value is set. A game machine characterized in that the second situation is more likely to occur when the game machine is present. 』
become.

Also, according to the descriptions after FIG. 33,
``Setting change that changes the setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, and b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 42];
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. This information can be obtained by both game shop clerks and players. In the case of a store clerk, this would be confirmation of setting changes before opening the store, and in the case of a player, it would be important information that would benefit oneself (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may continue to perform the setting-related notification during the first period (hereinafter the same).

The first period may be a period from when the operation for ending the setting change is performed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (hereinafter the same).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when the number of bets of 1 or more is set (hereinafter the same). Also, the setting-related notification may be notification suggesting that a predetermined set value is set (selected) as the set value (the same shall apply hereinafter). The predetermined set value may be a set value that provides the lowest degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of types of set values (hereinafter the same). In this case, the clerk of the amusement parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before the opening of the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the set value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid the playground where is being done.

The setting-related notification can be read as setting-related effect, and the notification means can be read as effect means (hereinafter the same).

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 42];
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding one of the plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting b] as the setting-related notification,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
The notification means does not execute the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, it becomes easy to specify that the one setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means executes the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set in the first period. It may not be.

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 42];
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding one of the plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting b] as the setting-related notification,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
When the one set value is set rather than when the set value different from the one set value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set has a higher frequency of executing the setting-related notification [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 37(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, it becomes easy to specify that the one setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is not executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, and is executed only when the certain setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a set value different from the one set value is set, including false notification. However, the execution frequency is as above.

In the first period, the notifying means may be configured such that, in the first period, the set value is higher when the one set value is set than when the set value different from the one set value is set. The frequency of executing the related notification may be high, or a period different from the first period (for example, a period after the start of the game (at the end of the chance zone, at the end of the battle production, at the end of the BB) , at the end of AT, etc.), the setting-related notification is more likely to be given when the one set value is set than when the set value different from the one set value is set. It may be one that is frequently executed.

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 42];
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 37(a)];
A game table comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a first set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value, which is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value [e.g., setting b] that provides a lower advantage to the player than the first set value [e.g., setting 1];
The predetermined display order is an order in which the second setting value [e.g., setting b] is displayed after the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, since the second set value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first set value, the fraudulent person who illegally changes the set value may is changed from the set value to the second set value, and a disadvantageous game may be played.

The second set value may be the one set value, and the notifying means may provide the setting-related notification related to one set value among the plurality of types of set values. It may be one capable of executing notification (hereinafter the same).

The set value display means may display the currently set set value (the same shall apply hereinafter).

setting value display means for displaying a setting value currently set; The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 42];
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value;
A game table comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a first set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value, which is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value [e.g., setting b] that provides a lower degree of advantage to the player than the first set value [e.g., setting 1];
The setting value display means displays a default setting value to be displayed first [for example, a setting value to be displayed first immediately after shipment from the factory, a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) for storing the setting value, and a setting value to be displayed first after the RAM is cleared. display the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] as the setting value displayed first when the backup power supply is lost] is a means of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. Also, even if the game clerk forgets to change the setting and the default setting value remains, the player can easily play the game.

The default setting value to be displayed first is the setting value to be displayed first when the gaming machine is initialized. That is, when the gaming machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

setting value display means for displaying a setting value currently set; The values are changed according to a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be the setting value positioned at the top of the predetermined order.

Also,
"The first period means that a game has not started even once [for example, from FIG. not] period,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the setting-related notification during a period in which no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never started may mean that the start lever has never been operated while the number of bets is set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification when an operation regarding the setting change is performed.

The certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change (hereinafter the same).

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation that is executed after the setting value is confirmed [for example, step S1115 in FIG. 42].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the setting value is determined.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation (setting change key (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
"Equipped with operating means [for example, setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation to switch the operating means in the ON state to the OFF state [for example, FIG. 45 (ko)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the operation means is switched to the OFF state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operation means (for example, a setting change key) that is switched to an on state when starting the setting change to an off state, and the on state may be a start state. Alternatively, the off state may be the end state (the same shall apply hereinafter). That is, the operation means may be means for switching between the start and end of the setting change by being operated (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification during the first period [for example, setting value display 293 shown in FIG. ],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this amusement machine, since the information about the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, redundant display is not performed by the setting value display means, and the control load is reduced. be.

Also,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
In the first period, the notification means may execute the setting-related notification with the door opened [for example, FIG. 45 (ko)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value from the setting-related notification even when the door is open.

The operation means may be one that can be operated when the door is in an open state (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the setting value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may not be visible when the door is closed (same below). In other words, it may be display means that is normally invisible to players (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The notification means may execute door opening notification when the door is opened, and may start the setting-related notification when the door opening notification ends (hereinafter referred to as same).

Also,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door closed [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, even when the door body is closed, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification.

Even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the door open notification. (same below).

The notification means may perform the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door is open, and may perform the setting-related notification even when the door is closed during the first period. may be executed (hereinafter the same).

The setting-related notification may continue regardless of whether the door is opened or closed, and may end when the number of bets equal to or greater than 1 is set (hereinafter the same).

Also,
"The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain set value is set as the set value.

The one set value may be a set value with the lowest degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of types of set values (the same shall apply hereinafter). In this case, the clerk of the amusement parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before the opening of the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the set value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid the playground where is being done.

I will continue to explain. As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing games with a three-coin bet. However, the game can also be played with a two-coin bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing a 3-bet game in the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is more advantageous for the player than performing a 2-bet game in the 3-bet bonus internal winning state. The bonus internal winning state is set as a normal game state, and the game is played with three bets as much as possible.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is in the normal game state that the two-coin bet bonus internal winning state is the normal game state. When the coin bet bonus game is completed, the gaming state becomes a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the double bet bonus non-internal winning state is entered. Further, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the initialization is automatically performed, resulting in a double bet bonus non-internal winning state.

It should be noted that when the setting change process is started, the initialization may not be automatically performed, but it may be possible to select whether or not to perform the initialization. For example, a setting change procedure may be used to initialize the setting values and the game state. More specifically, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is off, as in the case of changing settings. Next, in turning on the power switch 244, if the power switch 244 is turned on while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes 1 and the game state becomes a double bet bonus non-internal winning state. You may do so. In addition, it may also be in a non-advantageous section state. Also, the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 42) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, but the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the bet-two bonus game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the bet-two bonus game is in progress (for example, display of a flower figure). ). In addition, the remaining number of payouts, which is the condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "remaining cards during consumption"). Note that only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, a setting such as setting b, which is not originally set, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player, is prepared from the viewpoint of countermeasures against fraudulent players and the like. You can avoid this situation. However, even though the setting change process prevents the player from being significantly disadvantaged, the player remains at a disadvantage in the event that the two bet bonus is not won internally. Therefore, a notification is given to suggest that the two-coin bet bonus has not been won internally.

In the following description, the first gaming state refers to the non-internal winning state of the two-bet bonus, and the second gaming state refers to the internal winning of the two-coin bonus state. Note that the first gaming state includes a non-advantageous section state, a non-internal winning state not limited to double bets, the aforementioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a setting b , and the second game state can be applied to a state more advantageous than them, such as an advantageous interval state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal game state, items and points or set to one of settings 1, 2, 4-6.

Also, the first voice is a warning notification of "Please confirm". The first display is a character display of "Please confirm", and this character display is also an alert notification.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "completed". The second display is notification by text display of "Completed".

Further, when the game is started in the non-internally winning state of the two-bet bonus, a display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 suggesting that a transition to the internal winning state of the two-bet bonus is being attempted; A display suggesting that the player is in the non-internal winning state of the bet-on-one-piece bonus or a display prompting a shift to the internal winning of the two-piece-betting bonus state is displayed. Hereinafter, notifications by these displays are collectively referred to as "fourth notification". As the fourth notification, for example, "returning games" is displayed, and the number of games played in the state where the double bet bonus is not won is displayed. Players who know about this fourth notification know that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. The fourth notification may be displayed only when the game is played with two bets, or may be displayed regardless of the number of bets.

FIG. 55 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed. In FIG. 55, the steps (1) to (11) are assigned to each step, and time elapses in order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 55 shows, as items of components, the power switch 244, the front door 102, the open sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the set value display 293, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248, respectively. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker). . Also, at the bottom, an item of game state is provided.

In FIG. 55(1), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. A setting key is not inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set values are not displayed. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and the monitor LED are also turned off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 55(2), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Since the power has not yet been turned on, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal even if the front door 102 is opened.

In FIG. 55(3), the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power-on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started. The set value display 293 displays "1" as the default set value. In the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize as described above, if the initialization is not performed, the set value at the time of power-off stored in the power-off processing in step S221 is displayed. On the effect image display device 157, a setting change in progress display is displayed to inform that the setting is being changed, and a voice ("Setting is being changed") is also emitted from the speaker (272, 277) to inform that the setting is being changed. ) will be output. Since the power is turned on, the open sensor 294 starts outputting a detection signal indicating open detection, and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) all start lighting. Furthermore, the monitor LED also starts to light as the setting key switch 281 is turned on. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch ON signal is output from the external common terminal board 248 to the external device. Also, the game state is the first game state (2-bet bonus non-internal winning state) because the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42). However, in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, if the initialization is not performed, the game state at the time of power interruption stored in the power interruption processing of step S221 is entered. For this reason, there may be a second gaming state (two bet bonus internal winning state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated each time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 55(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Since the setting key switch 281 remains in the ON state even after the set value is determined, the monitor LED continues to light up. Although the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The setting is being changed", it may be arranged to output a voice saying "The setting has been changed."

In FIG. 55(5), turning the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 to the left turns it off. As a result, the setting change process is terminated (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the 7 segments of the setting value display 293 are extinguished. Also, the monitor LED is turned off. The voice from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the voice "Door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The voice output of "the door is open" switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. It should be noted that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "the setting change is completed" or "the setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. If the game state is the first game state when the setting change process is completed, the main control unit 300 transmits the first notification command to the first sub-control unit 400 . On the sub-controller side (first sub-controller 400 and second sub-controller 500), notification control (effect control) is executed based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the first character display such as "Please confirm" as an alert notification.

In FIG. 55 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to the L level close detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 55(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to an L-level closed detection signal, the main control section 300 transmits a door close command to the first sub-control section 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door closing command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command is received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs an alert notification " Please confirm." is output. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation and also continues to display the first display.

In FIG. 55(7), the front door 102 is opened, and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) all start lighting in the door opening pattern. Further, in the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is continued, and since the game state remains the first game state, the first display such as "Please confirm" is also continuously displayed. is the speaker (272,2
The audio from 77) reverts to the warning audio "Door is open". That is, the output of the first sound is started when the front door 102 is closed and ended when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the game parlor clerk has already noticed that the first game state remains due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing of FIG. To avoid this, the output of the first voice is terminated. It should be noted that the process may end when the front door 102 is opened two or more predetermined times. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during the game due to a hopper error, ball clogging, etc., if the predetermined number of times is two or more, the surrounding players may find it annoying. There is

In FIG. 55(8), the front door 102 is closed again while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). From the speakers (272, 277), a voice saying "The door is closed" is output, and repeated alerting notification is not executed. However, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display such as "Please confirm" along with the display of the demonstration animation. Of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R restart demo pattern lighting, and the title panel lamp 164 restarts white lighting. .

In FIG. 55(9), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. The insertion of medals here is a bet of 2 medals. Since a player usually bets 3 coins, the 2-coin bet is often operated by a store clerk. Moreover, it is often a preparatory operation before opening the store. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the demonstration animation display to the normal effect background display (normal background display). However, the first display, which is an alerting notification that the player is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Further, among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the normal effect lighting pattern (normal pattern).

In FIG. 55(10), the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the above-described fourth notification such as "1 game during recovery". Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 55(7), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games during recovery" is displayed, and when a game is started, "1 game during recovery" is displayed. may be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting 2 and the internal winning of the 2-betting bonus is won, a notification indicating the internal winning is made. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a navigation effect is also performed to avoid winning the double bet bonus. In this navigation effect, a sound calling attention is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 displays information about the stop positions of the reels at which bonus winning can be avoided.

In FIG. 55(11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, the first operation of the start lever 135 obtains the two-bet bonus internal winning state, and the stop operation avoiding the winning of the bonus changes the game state to the second game state. On the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display because the game state has shifted to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 56 summarizes the state of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. It is a table. In FIG. 56, the steps (1) to (5), (21) to (23) and (11) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

In FIG. 56 as well, the same items as in FIG. 55 are shown as items of constituent elements, and an item of game state is provided at the bottom (same as in FIG. 61).

56(1) to 56(5) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 56 (21), after the setting change process is completed, medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed while the front door 102 remains open. The insertion of medals here is a bet of 2 medals. Since a player usually bets 3 coins, the 2-coin bet is often operated by a store clerk. Moreover, it is often a preparatory operation before opening the store. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a sound of inserting a medal, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the demonstration animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), indicating that the player is in the first game state. The first display, which is an alert notification, is continuously displayed. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start door open pattern lighting.

In FIG. 56 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the above-described fourth notification such as "1 game during recovery". Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 56 (21), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games during recovery" is displayed, and when a game is started, "1 game during recovery" is displayed. may be displayed. Since the front door 102 remains open, all lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light up in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 56 (23), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is not output from the open sensor 294 ( switch to an L-level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a first voice such as "Please confirm" as an alert notification. In the example in FIG. 56, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. The first game state can be alerted by voice to the store clerk who is performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 rotate. Among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start normal pattern lighting, and the title panel lamp 164 starts white lighting. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the normal background and also continues to display the first display.

In FIG. 56(11), up to the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 56(11) is the same as FIG. 55(11), the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the game state becomes the second game state. In the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 57 shows the relationship when the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, power failure and power recovery occur during rotation of the reel, and the front door 102 is closed during reel rotation after power recovery. It is a table summarizing the states of the components that In FIG. 57, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (22) and (25) to (27) are assigned to the respective stages, and the time elapses in the order of this reference. .

57(1) to 57(5) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

(21) and (22) of FIG. 57 are the same as (21) and (22) of FIG. 55, so the description of (21) and (22) of FIG. Although omitted, the game is started with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 57(25), the power supply is interrupted while the game is being played (during the rotation of the reels 110 to 112) in a two-coin bet state, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 57(1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

Next, in FIG. 57 (26), the power is restored, and the reels 110 to 112 are restored to the state immediately before the power interruption while keeping the two-coin bet state. That is, if there is a reel that has already stopped rotating immediately before the power failure, that reel remains stopped, and the reel that was rotating immediately before the power failure starts rotating. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed in the normal background display. Also, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the door open pattern lighting. Also, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 57 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is not output from the open sensor 294 ( switch to an L-level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. It will be. If the power is cut off and restored before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first voice "Please check". This is so that the amusement arcade clerk can concentrate on checking the rotation of the reels after power is restored. Since the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the first display may make the store clerk aware that the game is in the first gaming state.

FIG. 58 is a table summarizing the states of related constituent elements when the front door 102 is closed during payout of the inserted medals before the front door 102 is closed after the setting change. In FIG. 58, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (31) and (32) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

Since FIGS. 58(1) to 58(5) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 58(21) is the same as FIG. 55(21), the description of FIG. 55(21) is used and the detailed description is omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 58 (31), the settlement button 134 is pressed in the state of betting two coins, and the hopper unit 180 starts paying out the two-coin medals and credit medals. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed in the normal background display even after the payout is started. On the other hand, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the settlement pattern. In addition, "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

58 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 58, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed while the game state is the first game state, the speaker (272, 277) will output a message "Please confirm" instead of the payout sound. One voice is output. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Note that the first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

FIG. 59 shows a configuration related to the case where the power failure and power recovery occurs during payout after settling the inserted medals before closing the front door 102 after the setting change, and the front door 102 is closed during payout after power recovery. It is a table summarizing the states of elements. In FIG. 59, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (31), (35) to (37) are assigned to the respective stages, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

59(1) to 59(5) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(5), so the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 59(21) is the same as FIG. 55(21), the description of FIG. 55(21) is used and the detailed description is omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 59(31) is the same as FIG. 58(31), the explanation of FIG. 58(31) is used and the detailed explanation is omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 59(35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 59(1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

Next, in FIG. 59 (36), the power is restored and the payout of the remaining medals that have not been paid out is started. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed in the normal background display. In addition, the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) all return to the settlement pattern lighting, and the speaker (272, 277) resumes outputting the payout sound. Also, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 59 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state during payout, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (L level closed detection). signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. Become. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first voice such as "Please confirm", and outputs the payout sound. continues. The reason why the first sound is not output is to allow the store clerk to concentrate on confirming the payout after power is restored. Since the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the first display may make the store clerk aware that the game is in the first gaming state. It should be noted that part or all of the payout sound may not be output during the payout period of the remaining medals after returning.

FIG. 60 is a table summarizing the states of related components when front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting change. In FIG. 60, the steps (1) to (5), (41), and (42) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

60(1) to 60(5) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(5), so the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 60(41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in FIG. 60(5), is turned on again. The state shown in FIG. 60 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the OFF state to the ON state. , the set value display 293 displays "1" which is the current set value. Also, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external common terminal board 248 start to light up. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. Also, the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a voice (“Confirming settings”) to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 continues to illuminate in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from demo pattern lighting to white lighting.

In FIG. 60 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first game state during setting confirmation, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 60 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. That's what it means. In this case, the speaker (272,
277) outputs the first voice "Please check" instead of the voice "Confirming settings". It should be noted that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the setting confirming display, and also continues to display the first display. In the explanation in FIG. 60, the character display such as "Please confirm" which is an alert notification is called the first display, but the setting confirmation display is called the first display, and the first voice is called the first display. In the example of FIG. 60, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

FIG. 61 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second game state after setting change. In FIG. 61, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (22), (45) and (46) are assigned to each stage, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

61(1) to 61(5) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(5), so the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

(21) and (22) of FIG. 61 are the same as (21) and (22) of FIG. 55, so the description of (21) and (22) of FIG. Although omitted, the game is started with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 61 (45), the third stop operation is performed while the front door 102 is open, the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the game state changes to the second game state. In the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. Also, the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a second voice saying "Completed".

In FIG. 61 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 61 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second game state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the main control section 300 transmits the door close command to the first sub-control section 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door closing command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command is received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs an alert notification " Please check." is output, but there is no problem even if it is output, and there is an advantage that the control processing does not become complicated. That is, the clerk understands the situation and is playing a game with a two-coin bet, and at the stage of the third stop (stage (45) in FIG. 61), the second display is displayed and the second sound is also output. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game to be started after this, the clerk does not have to worry about whether the transition to the second game state has occurred.

In the examples of FIGS. 55 to 61 described above, all of the examples are examples in which the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed as a certain operation after the setting change processing is performed. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the game state changes to the first game state. If the setting change process is performed regardless of whether the setting is changed, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the game state has shifted to the second game state as shown in the last example of FIG. That is, the first sound is output regardless of whether the game state is the first game state as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, if the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed without performing the setting change processing, the first sound is not output, but the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed after the reset switch 291 is pressed for a long time. A first voice may be output when the voice is heard. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed in the first game state regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed.

FIG. 62 shows the state of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a summary table. In FIG. 62, each stage is labeled from (50) to (59), and time elapses in ascending order of numbers.

FIG. 62 shows, as items of components, the power switch 244, the front door 102, the open sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the set value display 293, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248, respectively. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top and side lamps), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker). At the bottom, an item of medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 36 is provided. The game state is always the second game state (same up to FIG. 66).

In FIG. 62 (50), the power switch 244 is on and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs an L-level closed detection signal. The setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external collective terminal board 248 are off. A demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are illuminated in demo patterns, and the title panel lamp 164 is illuminated in white. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 , and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181 . Hereinafter, a state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or retraction is referred to as non-operation.

In FIG. 62 (51), the front door 102 is opened and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door opening pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "the door is open". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, in a state where the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The set value display 293 displays "1", which is the current set value, and the monitor LED starts lighting. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("Settings are being checked") to notify that the settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 , and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155 . Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protruding state is referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, it is impossible to care for the medals from the medal slot 141. - 特許庁That is, it is impossible to insert three medals, four or more medals, or one or two medals. In addition, the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is disabled. Furthermore, the operation of the start lever 135 and the settlement operation are not accepted, or are invalidated even if they are accepted.

In FIG. 62 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process is completed. The setting value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The voice from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the voice "the door is open". The effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. Medal blocker 172 is deactivated.

In FIG. 62 (54), when the front door 102 is opened, the protruding open/close piece is pushed down by hand, and the front door 102 is pseudo-closed so that the open sensor 294 cannot detect the open/close piece. As a result, the front door 102 is open, but the open sensor 294 outputs an L-level closed detection signal. There is no audio output such as "the door is open" from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 62 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is the ON operation in the state where the closed detection signal is output from the open sensor 294 . 62 (51), etc., the setting confirmation process is started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the front door 102 is open and the power is turned on. Strictly speaking, it starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. Therefore, in FIG. 62 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 The demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED starts lighting.

In FIG. 62 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound. In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even when the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where bet operation, start operation, and settlement operation can be performed. In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is switched to the normal background display. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern.

In FIG. 62 (57), the hand holding down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, the opening sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece, and an open detection signal is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door opening pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "the door is open". Figure 22
In the state of 1 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already on. Also, in the state of FIG. 62 (57), the bet number of 1 or more is set. When the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state and the number of bets of 1 or more is set, even if the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the effect image is displayed. On the display device 157, the normal background display continues. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (58), the payout button 134 is pressed to start the payout. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the settlement pattern. In addition, "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 62 (59), the payout is completed. 62(59), the setting key switch 281 has already been turned on, the payout has been completed (the number of bets has not been set), and the open sensor 294 has output an open detection signal. is in a state of In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays "1" which is the current setting value. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a sound such as "Setting confirmation is in progress" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).
The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains active.

In the example of FIG. 62 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in FIG. 62), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays the setting confirmation in progress display). is not displayed), and the settlement operation is performed with the number of bets of 1 or more set ((58) in the same figure). ((59) in the same figure) corresponding to the example in which the confirmation display is displayed.

FIG. 63 summarizes the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the game is played once. It is a table. In FIG. 63, the steps (50) to (57), (61) and (62) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

In FIG. 63 as well, the same items as in FIG. 64 are shown as items of constituent elements (same as in FIG. 66).

Since (50) to (57) in FIG. 63 are the same as (50) to (57) in FIG. 62, the description of (50) to (57) in FIG. 62 is used and the detailed description is omitted here. After confirming the settings, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medals are inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 63 (61), the start lever 135 is operated to start the game. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. The top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start normal pattern lighting. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. Medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 63 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. 63 (62), the setting key switch 281 has already been turned on, the game has ended (the number of bets has not been set), and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. is in a state of In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays "1" which is the current setting value. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a voice such as "Setting confirmation is in progress" is also output from the speakers (272, 277). The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains active.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in FIG. 63), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays during setting confirmation). is not displayed), and the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game is finished, the setting confirmation process is started (indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) corresponds to the example.

62 and 63, the number of bets is set when the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state and the open sensor 294 is outputting the open detection signal. When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

FIG. 64 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 64, the steps (1) to (3) and (71) to (78) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

Since FIGS. 64(1) to 64(3) are the same as FIGS. 55(1) to 55(3), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process has started.

In FIG. 64 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as the state of FIG. 64(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 64 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also turned off while the power switch 244 remains off, and the power switch 244 is turned on in the following figure (73). When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main controller initial setting process shown in FIG. 41 is started. First, the initial setting at startup (step S1001) restores the state immediately before the power failure. That is, even if the setting key switch 281 has been turned off, the fact that the setting key switch 281 was on just before the power was cut off is stored, and the set value display 293 displays the setting just before the power cut off. A value of "1" is displayed. In addition, the sub-control unit side (400, 500) also returns the backed-up information at the time of power failure, the effect image display device 157 displays the setting confirmation display, and the speaker (272, 277) says "Setting confirmation ” is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), in a game machine that does not store a backup when the power is cut off, the state immediately before the power cut-off is in the process of being changed. , a setting changing command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the sub-control unit side (400, 500) displays setting checking based on this setting changing command. is displayed, and a voice such as "Checking settings" is output.

As shown in the main control unit main process in FIG. 39, the main control unit initial setting process (setting change process (step S1013)) in FIG. 41 is executed only when power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was turned off before the power was turned on, the determination in step S1005 is No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off once, then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 64 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 64(76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 64 (76), the set value display 293 displays the set value "1", and the monitor LED starts lighting. In addition, a setting changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs "Setting changing".
sound is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 64 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Even if the setting value is determined, the monitor LED continues lighting because the setting key switch 281 remains on. Although the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice such as "The setting is being changed", it may be configured to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed." Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 64 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change processing ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the setting value display 293 is hidden. Also, the monitor LED is turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to "the door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. It should be noted that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "the setting change is completed" or "the setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

FIG. 65 shows a case where after the setting confirmation is performed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are settled. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components; In FIG. 65, the steps (50) to (54), (81), (82), and (57) to (59) are assigned to each stage, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

Since (50) to (54) in FIG. 65 are the same as (50) to (54) in FIG. 62, the description of (50) to (54) in FIG. , the front door 102 is pseudo-closed after one confirmation of the setting.

In FIG. 65 (81), when the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, token insertion such as handling of tokens or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound. In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is switched to the normal background display. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals have been inserted, in FIG. 65 (82), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is the ON operation in the state where the closed detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the setting value display 293 is turned off. The effect image display device 157 continues to display the normal background, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also,
Medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED starts lighting.

Since (57) to (59) in FIG. 65 are the same as (57) to (59) in FIG. 62, the description of (57) to (59) in FIG. , the false closing of the front door 102 ends, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. After that, the settlement operation is performed, the payout is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example of FIG. 65 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in FIG. 65), the setting confirmation process is not started when the number of bets is set to 1 or more. (The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.) A settlement operation is performed in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set ((58) in the same figure). This corresponds to an example in which the process is started (indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the effect image display device 157) ((59) in the same figure).

FIG. 66 shows the configuration elements related to the case where the setting key switch 281 is turned on after medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the game is played. is a table summarizing the states of In FIG. 66, the steps (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62) are assigned to the respective stages, and the time period It will pass.

Since (50) to (54) in FIG. 66 are the same as (50) to (54) in FIG. 62, the description of (50) to (54) in FIG. , the front door 102 is pseudo-closed after one confirmation of the setting.

(81) and (82) of FIG. 66 are the same as (81) and (82) of FIG. 65, so the explanation of (81) and (82) of FIG. Although omitted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on after medals are inserted. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the number of bets of 1 or more is set.

Since FIG. 66 (57) is the same as FIG. 62 (57), the explanation of FIG. 62 (57) is used and detailed explanation is omitted here. Become.

(61) and (62) in FIG. 66 are the same as (61) and (62) in FIG. 63, so the explanation of (61) and (62) in FIG. Although omitted, the start lever 135 is operated to start a game, and when the game ends after the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 66 described above is an example in which, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the bet number of 1 or more is set, the game can be continued with the set bet number. Equivalent to. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is also accepted. The setting of the bet number is given priority, and the game is continued with the bet number.

In the example of FIG. 66, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in FIG. 66), the setting confirmation process is not started when the number of bets is set to 1 or more ( The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157), the game is started with the set number of bets ((61) in the figure), and when the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed. This corresponds to an example in which a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 ((62) in the same figure).

65 and 66, when the number of bets of 1 or more is set, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the setting confirmation process is not started. The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the image display device 157, and a state different from the state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, payout processing is completed or the game is finished), the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, when the bet number of 1 or more is set, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the set value is not displayed on the set value display 293, and the bet number of 1 or more is set. When a state different from the state in which the bet number is set (a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, a state in which the payout process has been completed or a state in which the game has ended) value is displayed.

65(57) and FIG. 66(57), when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the number of bets of 1 or more is set (FIG. 65 (82), which corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIGS. 65(57) and 66(57), the opening sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened by releasing the hand holding down the opening/closing piece while the number of bets of 1 or more is set. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting confirmation in progress display.

The items described above with reference to FIGS. 45 to 66 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150P for temporarily storing game balls is provided in the upper rear portion of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through a communication hole formed in the bottom of 150P to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the back surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152P is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152P through the tank rail 154P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P. In other words, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that imparts driving force to game balls to convey the game balls.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either a high or low signal is output to a payout control unit (not shown). A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail and reach an upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P satisfies a prescribed condition for giving. Based on this, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the granting condition is awarded (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-controller that performs a second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P; a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing relating to the payout of game balls; , a launch board case 176P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control section that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply control section that supplies power to various electric game machines. A power supply board case 184P housing a power supply board 182P having a power switch 178P for turning on/off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180P for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. , and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and a character ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P. In this pachinko machine 100P as well, by opening the main body 104, turning on the setting change key 192P, and then turning on the power switch 178P, at least one of a plurality of set values with different jackpot probabilities can be set. Setting change processing is started. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P, and the clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while confirming this. Also, by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P. Is displayed. The setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated under the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on.

The pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 has settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, and b, which are the same as the setting values of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. are displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order as . Also, setting b is the most unfavorable set value for the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the set value for the player.

The character item ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156P and arranged inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. Note that the role product ratio/setting display device 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, the main body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, and detects the opening of the main body (not shown). The main body open sensor corresponds to the open sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the character ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the set value display 293. Also, the main substrate 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 and the external centralized terminal board (not shown) are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. In addition, a liquid crystal display device and speakers used for various effects are also provided. Further, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game frame is provided with a game frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
"A first gaming state [for example, a bet-2-bonus non-internal winning state or setting b is set] and a second gaming state [for example, a bet-2-bonus internal winning state or setting 1 is set. A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] capable of executing control to shift to one game state out of a plurality of game states including the state],
A first notification [e.g., the first voice of "Please confirm" or turn off of the title panel lamp 164] with an executable notification means [e.g., the speaker (272, 277) or the title panel lamp 164] ,
A game table comprising
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102 or an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first game state. is a means,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it.

The first gaming state is a state in which the first number is betted and the bonus is not won, and the second gaming state is the first number being betted and the bonus is not won. It may also refer to an internally elected state in which a lottery has been elected (the same shall apply hereinafter). Alternatively, the first gaming state is an internal winning state in which the first number is betted and the bonus is won, and the second gaming state is a second gaming state that is greater than the first number. It may also be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting the number of coins (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The second game state is a normal game state or an initial setting game state, and the first game state is a state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state [for example, penalty bonus state, setting b is set], and the first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous section state, a bonus non-matching state, a state in which points or items are not acquired, etc. (same below).

A door is provided, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door is open, or an operation to close the door ( The same applies below).

The first notification is a notification suggesting the first gaming state or a notification to make the player aware of the first gaming state [for example, a notification saying "I am in the first gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be an alert notification that does not specify an alert target [for example, a notification such as "Please check"] (the same applies below).

The notification means includes first notification means [for example, speakers (272, 277)], second notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164], and third notification means [for example, effect image display device 157] (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the game state when the setting b is set may be the first game state, and in that case, the game mode may change during the game state with RT=game mode (the same applies below ).

Furthermore, instead of the game state control means, "game control means for controlling a game based on the setting of the first set value and a game based on the setting of the second set value ”, and the game (first game) executed based on the setting of the first setting value is executed based on the setting of the second setting value It may be a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the played game (second game) (the same applies below). Further, the first game state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second game state can be read as a state in which the second set value is set (hereinafter (same for

Also, in place of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain hand is internally won as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of bets, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not in the internal winning state" and the non-internal winning state may be more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (same below). Also, the first game state can be read as the non-internally elected state, and the second game state can be read as the internally elected state (same below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a reel [e.g., reels 110-112];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification during rotation of the reel [for example, FIG. 56 (23)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while the clerk of the amusement arcade is performing a maintenance action to check whether the reels rotate, the clerk's attention can be called.

The reel can start rotating before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means issues the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating. It may be any means that may be implemented.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a reel [e.g., reels 110-112];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The reel can start rotating before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 56 (22), FIG. 57 (22)],
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating [for example, FIG. 56 (23)],
In the case where power failure and power recovery occurs before the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating [for example, (25) to (26) in FIG. 57], the notification means Means that does not execute the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the [for example, FIG. 57 (27)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while the clerk of the amusement arcade is performing a maintenance action to check whether the reels rotate, the clerk's attention can be called. On the other hand, after a power failure/recovery occurs, it is possible to concentrate on confirmation work after power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a dispensing means [e.g., hopper unit 180];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of payout processing in the payout means [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while a game parlor clerk is performing a maintenance action to check whether the payout process is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called.

The payout means is means capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed. It may be means that may execute the first notification.

The payout process may be a process started by a checkout operation after inserting medals, or may be a process performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation after inserting medals.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a dispensing means [e.g., hopper unit 180];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The payout means is means capable of starting payout processing before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 58 (31) or FIG. 59 (31)],
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
When power failure and power recovery occurs during the period of the payout process and before the certain operation is performed [for example, (35) to (36) in FIG. Means that does not execute the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the process [for example, FIG. 59 (37)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained. It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while a game parlor clerk is performing a maintenance action to check whether the payout process is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called. On the other hand, after a power failure/recovery occurs, it is possible to concentrate on confirmation work after power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, character display of "Please check"] [for example, FIG. 6)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. Further, even while the store clerk is performing maintenance to check whether the display on the display means is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called.

The display means is means capable of starting display of the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is capable of starting the display of the first display while the first display is being displayed. may be means that may execute the first notification when is performed.

Also,
"The gaming state control means, when a certain condition [for example, the condition that a bonus combination is won with a predetermined number of bets and the bonus combination is not won] is established, the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state." A means for executing control to transition to a game state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The first notification serves as a warning to perform the initial setting.

Also,
"The certain condition is a condition including one or more games being played [for example, one or more games must be played to win a bonus combination],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

When the store clerk runs the game before the store opens, the player can start playing from the second game state.

The certain condition is a condition including the execution of one or a plurality of games with a predetermined number of bets and the winning of a certain hand. In other words, the certain condition may be a condition that may be met by winning a certain hand after playing a game with a predetermined number of bets. The condition may be established by playing a game in the state and winning a certain combination but not winning the certain combination. What has been described here also applies to the following.

Also,
``The notifying means is means for not executing the first notifying when the certain operation is performed for a predetermined number of times [for example, the second time] [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In many cases, the store clerk has already noticed the certain operation after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), so redundant notification can be avoided.

Also,
``The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [for example, a second voice of 'Completed]'] when the first game state transitions to the second game state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By the second notification, it can be confirmed that the game state disadvantageous to the player has been resolved.

The second notification is a notification suggesting that the second game state has been entered or a notification suggesting that the game state is in the second game state [for example, a notification such as "second game state"]. Alternatively, it may be an alert notification that does not specify an alert target [for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returned"] (the same applies below).

Also,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 42],
When the certain operation is performed after the setting change process [for example, the process including operating the power switch 244, the setting key switch 281, etc., which cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened] is completed. is an operation with
When the notification means executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first game state after the setting change process is started, when the game state is the first game state. is a means [for example, FIG. 55(6)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the player is still at a disadvantage in the first game state even though the setting change processing is started and the adjustment of the player's advantage degree is started, the notification means executes the first notification. , the first game state can be noticed by the person who performs the setting change.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door is opened (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``The notifying means is means capable of executing a third notification after the setting change process is started [for example, FIG. 55 (3)] and before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 55 (5)],
The third notification is a notification that is executed when the setting change process is completed [for example, a voice notification saying "The door is open" or "The setting has been changed"].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The notification means may be means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies below).

Even if the third notification is a notification that the setting change processing has ended or a notification that suggests that the setting change processing has ended [for example, a notification such as "The setting change has been completed"] Alternatively, it may be a notification about the state of the gaming machine [for example, a notification such as "the door is open"] (same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process for confirming one setting value set from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
A game table comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)], the bet number set in the first state [for example, set in FIG. number of bets] can be continued [for example, FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player.

The game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and after the game is finished, the next game is not started unless the setting confirmation process is finished. good.

If the operation means is operated while medals have not been inserted, subsequent bet operations may not be accepted. That is, the game may not be started when the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed in a state where no betting operation is performed.

The case where the operation means has been operated means the case where the setting confirmation process has not been executed. A setting change means for performing a setting change process for changing a setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, wherein the operation means It may be means that is also operated when changing settings (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process for confirming one setting value set from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game table comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operating means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)], the bet number set in the first state [for example, set in FIG. number of bets] can be continued [for example, FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
When the operation means is operated, the display means may display a first display [e.g., "setting confirmation in progress display] [e.g., FIG. 66 (52)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player. That is, after the operation means is operated, the game parlor clerk can confirm the first display by the display means, and the first display can detect the fraudulent act, and the fraudulent person can be exposed. Sometimes.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door is opened, and the display means detects that the sensor has opened the door. means for displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 62 (52)] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is not detecting, and the operation means is operated while the sensor is not detecting (55) in FIG. 62] may be a means for not displaying the first display when the is performed.

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process for confirming one setting value set from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
operation means (for example, setting key switch 281) operated when confirming the setting; display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)], the bet number set in the first state [for example, set in FIG. number of bets] can be continued [for example, FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
When the operation means is operated, the display means may display a first display [e.g., "setting confirmation in progress display] [e.g., FIG. 66 (52)],
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [eg, FIG. 65 (82)], and the settlement operation is performed in the first state [eg, 65 (58)] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player. That is, after the operation means is operated, the game parlor clerk can confirm the first display by the display means, and the first display can detect the fraudulent act, and the fraudulent person can be exposed. Sometimes. In addition, even if the operation means is operated, the first display may not be displayed. It may be possible to discover the act and expose the fraudulent person.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] for detecting that the door is opened are provided, and the display means indicates that the sensor indicates that the door is open. 62 (52)] for displaying a first display [for example, setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is detecting the It may be a means that does not display the first display [for example, FIG. 62 (55)] when the operation means is operated in the state of detection.

Also,
"Medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
a first passageway;
a second passageway [e.g., reservoir passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, a medal blocker 172] that sorts the medals inserted from the medal slot into one of the first passage and the second passage;
with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266];
The medal blocker may sort the medals inserted from the medal slot into the first path when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 62 (52)]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

After operating the operating means, the game store clerk can check how the medals have passed. In addition, since the game cannot be started after the operation means is operated, the store clerk can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake. The medal return path is a path leading to a medal ejection port [for example, medal ejection port 155].

The second path is a medal storage path [for example, the storage path 173], and medals passing through the medal storage path are stored in a bucket (storage tank) [for example, the bucket 181].

Also,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The operating means is means that can be operated when the door is in the open state [for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

Also,
``The operation means can be operated even in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. is a means that may be
The medal blocker sorts the medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operation means is operated in the second state [for example, FIG. 55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not hindered.

A sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] is provided to detect that the door is open, the operation means is means that becomes operable by opening the door, and the second state is the It may also mean that the sensor is in a non-detection state.

Further, the medal blocker may sort the medals inserted from the medal slot into the second path when the operation means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 62(55)].

Also,
``Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 62 (55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not hindered.

The set value display means may not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

Also,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the operating means is operated [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the operating means is being operated normally. In particular, when the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A transmitting means [for example, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [for example, a setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [for example, a hall computer] when the operation means is operated is provided. Characteristic playground. 』
also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. In particular, when the setting value display means does not display the setting value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the setting value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
`` A gaming machine equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]',
65 (81) or FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted, such as medal care or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132]. Means for not displaying the first display when [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") [for example, FIG. 82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout by settlement operation or end of the game with the bet amount set in the first state], the display means the first display is displayed [e.g., FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
`` A gaming machine equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]',
The display means displays the first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281] in the first state [for example, the state of FIG. is turned on] is performed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), means for not displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82 )],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout by settlement operation or end of the game with the bet amount set in the first state], the display means The first display is displayed [eg, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means displays the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation for causing the opening sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is maintained after the first case. means not to display [for example, FIG. 65 (57) or FIG. 66 (57)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even when the second operation is performed while the first state is maintained after that, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] for detecting that the door is opened are provided, and the second operation is detected by the sensor when the door is opened. It may be an operation for detecting that.

Also, according to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]'];
setting value display means capable of displaying setting values [for example, setting value display 293];
, wherein the display means is the first display means in a first state [for example, the state of FIG. [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), the first display is not displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout due to settlement operation or end of game with the number of bets set in the first state] (hereinafter referred to as "second ), the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The setting value display means is means capable of displaying the setting value in the second case.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even when the second operation is performed while the first state is maintained after that, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The set value may be selected from a plurality of types of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

In addition,
"The display means is means for not displaying the setting value in the first case.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the setting value is not displayed, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with higher priority.

Also,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door is open [for example, (52), (82), (52), and (82) in FIG. 65]. is
A playground characterized by: ” was also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

Also,
"The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

Also,
"Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying setting values,
The setting value display means may not display the setting value even if the first operation is performed [for example, FIG. 62 (55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Since the setting value is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player. For example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special combination or a big win, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may differ. Different (same below).

Also,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
was also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the first operation is normally performed. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is equipped with a transmission means [eg, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [eg, a setting key switch ON signal] to an external device [eg, a hall computer] when the first operation is performed. Characteristic playground. 』
was also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the first operation is performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to check from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
"An operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by an operation;
A gaming machine comprising setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying setting values,
The set value display means is means for displaying the set value when there is an ON operation [for example, FIG. 65 (52) or FIG. 66 (52)],
The ON operation is an operation to switch the operation means from the OFF state to the ON state,
The setting value display means may not display the setting value even if the ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In other words, the setting value display means is means for displaying the setting value and not displaying the setting value when the ON operation is performed.

Even if an unauthorized person illegally performs the ON operation during business hours, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized person from confirming the setting value.

A door and a sensor for detecting that the door is open, and the set value display means is operated when the ON operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door is open. and means for not displaying the set value when the operation means is operated while the sensor is in a non-detection state.

Also,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The ON operation is an operation that can be performed when the door is in an open state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

Also,
"The set value display means is a means that may display the set value when the operation means is in the OFF state [for example, FIG. 64 (73)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The setting value can be checked even when the operating means is in the OFF state, and the workability of the maintenance work by the store clerk may be improved.

When power is restored while the operating means is in the ON state and the power is restored after switching the operating means to the OFF state, the display means displays the set value display.

Also,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the ON operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
was also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the ON operation is normally performed. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation is performed, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is characterized by having a transmitting means [eg, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [eg, a setting key switch ON signal] to an external device [eg, a hall computer] when the ON operation is performed. Playground to play. 』
also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the ON operation is performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm the setting value from the outside.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

68 to 167, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 68 to 167 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 68 to 167 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 167, the symbols shown in FIGS. 68 to 167 are prioritized.

The slot machine described below employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (virtual medal count) is used. We will use

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of game medals are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are applied thereto, a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received to start rotation of the reels. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the combination of symbols based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and finished. This is a gaming machine that advances a series of games that ends without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if they do not match.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 is the upper symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 is the middle symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 is the lower symbol of the left reel, and the middle reel. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of 111 is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 is the middle stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 is the lower stage symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is The symbols displayed on the upper stage are called right reel upper stage symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 are called right reel middle stage symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 112 are called right reel lower stage symbols. Each of the symbols 112 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are 5 pay lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When the book becomes valid and 3 medals are bet, the 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line become valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the bottom right pay line. Five lines, ie, the winning line and the rising winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internal winning state has been carried over. It is a lamp that informs the player. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When the button is pressed once, one sheet is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of two sheets) is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of three sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are thrown. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. It should be noted that, hereinafter, the expression "given to the player" may be used in the same sense as "payout to the player". The game information display 126 and the number-of-payouts display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is the "forward pushing operation order" or simply The stop operation is called "forward push", the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110. referred to as "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information about the order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 . This indication monitor 125 also consists of a seven segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 139 are displayed. When instructing to operate the stop button 138 in order, “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor 125 .

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (the number of bets) to the medal number control section 350 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device for displaying the game medal number recorded by the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG.

The count button 171 is an operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 69) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the production device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 69) to the outside. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

A lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is sometimes called a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100 .

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. The other is a membership card, which is a game storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member of a game arcade. An IC card is used as the card.

Valuable value is stored in the card. Valuable values stored in the card include "number of medals possessed" and "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card into the "number of game medals (credits)". The “number of game medals (number of credits)” is data that can be used for setting the number of bets and can be converted into “number of medals possessed”. The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "monetary balance" of the card or the "number of medals possessed". In addition, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning prizes. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69, and is the number of electronic medals (amount of electronic game value) electromagnetically stored. By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The “number of medals possessed” is a value obtained by converting the “number of game medals (number of credits)” into a numerical value. This "number of medals possessed" is stored so as to be identifiable by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of owned medals", which can be stored in the card. The "number of owned medals" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of owned medals installed in the game arcade.

On the front side of the lending machine 700, a banknote insertion slot 701 for inserting banknotes is provided at the top, and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting cards is provided at the bottom. A card reader/writer receives a member card or visitor card inserted into the card slot 702, and reads information stored in the card. The bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified for authenticity and bill type, and the denomination of the bill is stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance".

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701 . This information display device 703 is a display device for providing operation guidance of the rental machine 700, the state of the slot machine 100, and the like in the form of characters and images. It should be noted that the surface may be composed of a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed items with a finger.

Under the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two stages, one above the other. The "money balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 is displayed on the money balance display 705 as the amount. On the other hand, the medal number balance display 706 displays the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided at the central portion of the lending machine 700 in the vertical direction. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation for withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 and obtaining the "number of game medals." Specifically, when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the money to be withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Also, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" corresponding to the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing the "number of medals" stored in the card. good. A card return button 708 is operated by the player when the game ends, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card slot 702 and ejecting the card. is. The "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game is obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted from the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 into the "number of game medals", and then counting. The number of medals is obtained by adding the number of game medals counted by the operation. Each of the data of "monetary balance", "number of medals", and "number of game medals" described above is stored in the order of "money balance" and "number of medals" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals". will be converted. In this way, the "number of game medals" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". Therefore, players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are lent, credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits are confused. It is possible to provide a game by a new slot machine (management game machine) that does not use real medals without giving any money.

Although this specification does not mention "the number of stored medals", this "the number of stored medals" is the number of owned medals deposited in the game hall rather than being stored in the card. In the game arcade, the number of medals acquired by the player in the game is managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. number" may be managed. When both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of owned medals" are stored, the "number of owned medals" is preferentially withdrawn. Further, both the "number of medals possessed" and the "number of medals saved" may be stored in the host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 72) in association with the card number. In the case of the visitor card, the "number of medals possessed" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals possessed" may be stored in the host server in association with the card number. When the card number is stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the host server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and ejected. As for the "monetary balance", the card (membership card, visitor card) is directly written and ejected. The timing at which the "number of medals possessed" is stored in a card (member card, visitor card) or the host server is, for example, the timing at which the counting button 171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the card may be stored collectively when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals possessed" stored in the lending machine 700 is once stored in the hall management terminal 800 as accumulated medals. When the player reinserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 on the same day as the card is returned, only the "number of medals possessed" for that day, which was once stored as accumulated medals, is returned to the lending machine. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals possessed" to enable a game to be played.

Also, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR sensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by a game hall attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 allows lending of the "number of game medals" by operating the lending button 707 and withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card. It may be possible to withdraw the "number of medals possessed" and convert it to "number of game medals". Specifically, a coin holding button is provided in the lending machine 700, and when the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of holding medals", an LED lamp built into the holding medal button can be pulled out. Lights up in a manner that represents By operating the possess medal button in this state, if the number of possess medals is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 50), the predetermined number (eg, 50) of "game medal count" is added. In addition, the above-described number of medals acquired by the player in the game is stored in the card as "points" during the day, or managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. When there is a "score", the built-in LED lamp of the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

《Main control unit》
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of game control means, and the medal count control unit 350 corresponds to an example of game value control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, pattern arrangement of reels, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the medal count control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown). Then, a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 executes game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. Start (start the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

Also, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of the bet buttons 130 and 132, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process of electronically inserting medals electronically stored in the medal number control section 350 as medals to be inserted into a game is executed. When it detects that the start lever 135 has been turned on, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit. The random number generating circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. When it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal count control section 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the state of various sensors 318 (the optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 drives display devices such as a driving circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 70) provided for the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A driving circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121). I have.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, set values are set to give different degrees of advantage to the players. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 is connected to the game control unit 302 to be operated when changing the setting value.

In addition, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300, via this information output circuit 328, outputs an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 72) or the like. 650 outputs the game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game).

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 respectively.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 362 is installed. The CPUs 304 and 354 are provided on the same substrate and connected via a buffer IC. As a result, the CPU 304 is made to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 and the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 are not made to be used, and the CPU 354 is made to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 and the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 are not made to be used. A WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control section 350 executes an interrupt process (a medal number control section timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Further, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300 ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also has a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also outputs this start signal. When the activation signal is input from the circuit, medal count control is started (the medal count control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is connected to a game medal number display device 170 composed of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171 and a game medal number clear button 172 .

In addition, the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is also connected to the lending machine 700 via a lending machine connection terminal board 790 . The medal count control section 350 performs two-way communication with the lending machine 700 .

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302 . The game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350 . That is, the communication between the medal count control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also two-way communication.

Also, the medal count control unit 350 stores the “game medal count” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 . Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the “game medal count” stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. As the addition processing, processing based on a payout command transmitted from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command transmitted from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 is given. On the other hand, as subtraction processing, there are counting processing based on operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on an input command transmitted from the game control section 302 .

Note that the number-of-game-medals clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player is absent with "2" remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who has left "2" intends to continue playing the game. Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the clerk's operation, another player can be welcomed early. When the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not always cleared. , counting may be performed in the same manner as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 fails to recognize that the counting button 171 has been operated, the ``number of game medals'' cannot be converted into the ``number of medals possessed,'' and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. However, if the counter can be counted by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the store clerk, there is no cost increase. It should be noted that clearing and counting may not be determined by judging the number of game medals, and clearing and counting may be determined according to the operation method of the game medal number clear button 172 . For example, it is cleared when pressed for a short time, and counted when pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Also, it is cleared when only the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, and is counted when the number of game medals clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time. It is less likely that you will make a mistake in operation, and you can easily choose between clearing and counting.

《Sub-controller》
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, data for controlling the lighting pattern of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of the rendering means.

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of effect means.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 70 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 109, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 70 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. A power switch 244 is also shown.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit forming the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. ing.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4 to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 109 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 70 also shows the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, on the first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 70, there are also a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 69 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits configuring other drive circuits 424, 426 and the like are also mounted.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the production movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, respectively, and the motor 163m provided in the production movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 also includes a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG. 69, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power failure state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state in which no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. 70 that lights up in the energized state ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 70) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel driving IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs indicated at 70 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not normally connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 68 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 70) that opens and closes the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 71 shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 70 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 71, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 71, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 71, the provision of the reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and the number of connectors compared to the connection example shown in FIG. is becoming more sexual. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, and the shutter 163 are described as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and may be motor-driven movable bodies.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible. These light emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor and is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted.

In addition, the configuration described above is
light emitting means;
a movable body unit having a movable body operable by being driven by a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means,
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that it does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 72 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, the gaming system S has a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, a lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. The rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it has storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, installed in each of the game halls (halls) H1, H2, . . . Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100 , the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700 . To the hall management terminal 800, information about the number of medals (counting information and lending information) performed between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 and information about the operating state of the slot machine 100 are input. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided for overall management of the gaming system 1, and includes information on the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Management server 820 is connected to hall management terminals 800 of many halls via intermediate management terminals 810, and information obtained by communicating with hall management terminals 800, that is, information on the number of medals, slot Information such as the operating state of the machine 100 is also managed.

<<Communication sequence and communication contents>>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 . The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control state command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal count control unit 350 transmits a medal count control command (medal count control state command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control section 350, the response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted preferentially to the medal number control state command.

In the communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 and the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received. be.

FIG. 73 is a table summarizing gaming machine state information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 73(a) is roughly divided into three types of state information: advantageous state information, setting state information, and front door state information. The advantageous state information includes information (RB information) indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB, information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It consists of information (AT information) indicating whether or not. The setting state information includes information indicating whether or not the setting state is changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. information). The front door state information is information (door open information) indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state. Note that the AT state is a game state in which auxiliary functions such as notification of the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of symbols to be aimed and stopped are activated so that the player can obtain advantageous results.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) includes total inserted number information, total payout number information, MY counter value information, total role payout number information, continuous role total payout number information, number of games played information, role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total inserted number information is information representing the accumulated number of inserted medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The total payout number information is information representing the cumulative number of payout medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power is turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which the order of stop operations for internally won hands is notified, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the number of net increase in medals after shifting to this state. The information on the total payout number of the accessory is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the accessory accumulated since the power was turned on. The continuous accessory total payout number information is information representing the payout number of medals due to the operation of the RB accumulated since the power was turned on. The number-of-games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The role ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (role ratio, continuous role ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructed role ratio, role state ratio) for evaluating the gambling nature of the gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c) includes two types of information, ie, game control section information and medal number control section information. The game control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the game control section 302, the maker code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control section 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 74 shows the first sub-controller 400, the game controller 302, the medal count controller 350, and the lending machine 700 from the left.

First, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained before explaining the game control state command. A token amount control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700 , and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the token number control section 350 and the lending machine 700 . Communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 74, the game machine information notification and the count notification are transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . In addition, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 , and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control section 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700 .

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the details of communication between the medal count control section 350 and the lending machine 700. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the data structure of messages exchanged in communication between the medal number control section 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number for the count notification, and the lending serial number for the lending notice and the lending reception result response notice. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when reaching 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. Various types of data are stored in the data section, and the checksum is the sum of the data from the message length to the data section, and the lower 1 byte of the sum is stored.

FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of the game machine, such as pachinko type game machine, reel type game machine, and arrange ball game machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control/fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described with reference to FIG. The game machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing the details of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information.

The information on the number of game medals is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350 .

The information on the number of inserted medals is the number of inserted medals, and the number of returned medals when there are returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 68) is operated. Minute information (-3 to 3 sheets). That is, it is information based on information on the number of inserted medals and information on the number of settled medals included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The paid-out medal number information is information representing the number of paid-out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on information on the number of payout medals included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 73(a) described using FIG. In addition, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

Gaming machine error state information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 76(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 76(b), the medal count control state commands, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error generation command).

Only errors that require special explanation will be explained below. The medal number control disconnection is an error when the game control unit 302 detects the disconnection of the medal number control unit 350, and the game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when it is detected. The game order abnormality is an error that the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error that the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is out of the range of 0 to 15 sheets. That is, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of coins for one payout is fifteen. The settlement number mismatch is an error when the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is equal to or greater than the input number. Chip ID number disagreement is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control section information shown in FIG. 73(c) is different from the previous information. The medal count control RAM error is an error that indicates that the RAM 358 of the medal count control section 350 is defective. The lending machine communication abnormality is an error such that a lending notification is not received even though the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state, which will be described later in detail. 76(b), all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. Also, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

The gaming machine fraud information includes setting state information and front door information shown in FIG. 73(a) described using FIG. It contains information, a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected, and the like.

The information on the number of game information is the information on the current bet amount and the information on the payout amount. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. The current bet number is included in the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. bet is the current bet value. Also, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the number of payouts is the value of the number of payouts included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 75(b), in the game machine information notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms, the game machine information of the code specified by the game machine information type is included. stored. That is, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the hall controller・Incorrect monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time (for example, 180 seconds), The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time period (eg, 60 seconds), and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is notified at the shortest third time period (eg, 300 ms of notification cycle). When the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hall control/fraud monitoring information with the highest number of notifications.

FIG. 75(c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the count notification transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74, the count notification is sent within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of notification of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 99 to be described later. Further, although details will be described later, when the count button 171 shown in FIG. 68 is pressed once for a short time, the number of sheets to be counted increases by one, and when the count button 171 is pressed for a plurality of times until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. , the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the counted number. On the other hand, when the cycle of 300 ms arrives while the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more, the number of sheets to be counted is 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet, or 50 sheets can be set at once. However, if the number of counted medals exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the number of counted medals. The medal number information is information representing the number of medals to be counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The number of counted accumulated medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. FIG. 75(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the lending notification sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 at intervals of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal count control section 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. The medal number control unit 350 monitors whether or not the lending notification is notified within 170 ms by the lending notification interval timer set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 101 to be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is operated, if the "monetary balance" of the card is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (eg, 1000 yen), the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount (eg, 50) is the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals corresponding to the operation of the loan button 707 in this way. It should be noted that the predetermined amount and the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount can be set in the lending machine 700 in advance.

FIG. 75(e) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control section 350 to the lending machine 700. FIG. Although details will be described later, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of loaned medals notified by the loan notification is 50 or less, or the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than the lending threshold value (for example, 15000). or whether counting processing is not performed, etc., and decides whether the loaned medal number reception result is normal or abnormal. This receipt result is sent to the lending machine 700 in the lending receipt result response.

Next, the game control state commands that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms will be described.

FIG. 77 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the high-order byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining high-order 7 bits represent the command type, and the low-order byte represents the content. FIG. 77 also shows command offsets used for transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms, transmits a command representing setting state information (information during setting change, information during setting confirmation). After 2.98 ms have elapsed, a command representing front door state information (door open information) is transmitted. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine status information.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 13H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 14H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of payouts in 3 bytes (total number of payouts information) is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 16H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 17H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 batches of 1 byte each and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 19H, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 1AH, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 1BH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the information representing the total number of payouts of the role product in 3 bytes (information on the total number of payouts of the role product) is divided into three 1-byte portions three times at intervals of 2.98 ms. to send. That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms elapses, information representing the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in 3 bytes (continuous bonuses total payout number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games in 2 bytes (number of games information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 22H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 23H is transmitted.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the role ratio monitor information is transmitted over 5 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits the information indicating the role ratio, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information indicating the continuous role ratio with the command type of the upper byte of 26H, and the advantageous section ratio is sent with the command type with the upper byte of 26H. , the command type with the upper byte of 27H transmits the information indicating the instructed role product ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 28H sends the information indicating the role product state ratio. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has passed, the game control unit information is transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms over 15 commands. That is, the information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 by 4 bytes is divided into 4 times by 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, the information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, the information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 8 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, it returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 77 are repeatedly transmitted one by one at intervals of 2.98 ms. In addition, when there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command that the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms will be described.

FIG. 78 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control state command is also a 16-bit command, and the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits indicate the command type, and the lower byte indicates the content. FIG. 78 also shows command offsets used for transmission. The medal count control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information, and may include other information.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into upper and lower 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 02H is transmitted for the lower 1 byte, and when 5.96 ms elapses, the command type with the upper byte of 03H is transmitted for the upper 1 byte.

When 5.96 ms elapses, information representing the counted number of sheets (counted number of sheets information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms elapses, information representing the rented number of sheets (lending number of sheets information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code explained using FIG. 76(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal count control state command shown in FIG. 78 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, when there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 74 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a cycle of 100 ms will be described.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information, information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like. The information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the number of counted tokens, and the information representing the number of loaned tokens are the information transmitted from the medal count control section 350 by the medal count control state command.

Various processing commands are also transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The various processing commands include, for example, a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to setting value changes, a setting change end command including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and the number of input sheets. a bet command including a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed; an effect information command including effect information; a start lever reception command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been received; Examples include first to third press commands associated with acceptance of an operation, game information commands including game information, payout start commands representing the start of payout, and the like. Errors in the error generation command and the error cancellation command include, in addition to the errors indicated by the error codes described with reference to FIG. This includes an open error, a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, and the like.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350. As shown in FIG.

The game control priority command is a command transmitted with priority over the game control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again if there is a retransmission request from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command. Drawing 80 (a) is a figure showing the details of a game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued without this response command being returned. There are two types of things. The former game control priority command is called a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is called a game control priority command 2. FIG. 79 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an insertion command, and a settlement command. As for the payout command, the payout number (0 to 15) is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 04H, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 05H, and finally the command type of which the upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in the transmission of the payout command, three commands are transmitted continuously.

The input command transmits the number of inserted sheets (0 to 3 sheets) with a command type of which the upper byte is 07H, then transmits the command serial number with a command type of which the upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type of which the upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when an input command is transmitted.

For the settlement command, the number of sheets to be settled (0 to 3 sheets) is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0AH, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0BH, and finally the command type with the upper byte of 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when the settlement command is transmitted.

When receiving the game control priority command 1, the medal count control section 350 shown in FIG. 79 transmits a response command.

FIG. 80(b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG.

The response command is sent in response to the payout command (payout response), in response to the input command (input response), and in response to the settlement command (settlement response). There is The response command has a value of 00H in the upper byte, which is the value of the command type. The payout response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request for the payout command. Here, normal corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormal corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold value (for example, 16383) due to payout.

The input response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request of the input command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to completion of loading, and abnormal corresponds to failure of loading or invalidity of loading.

The settlement response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-request of the settlement command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to the completion of settlement, and abnormality corresponds to the case where the number of game medals exceeds the settlement threshold value (for example, 16383) due to settlement. The settlement threshold is the same value as the payout threshold described above.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and is a command that includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 76(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and the RAM 308 normality determined by the game control unit 302 or the RAM 308 defect determined by the game control unit 302 is included.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the bet amount is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information indicating the determined bet amount (current bet amount: 1 to 3) is included. command.

《Pattern arrangement》
Each reel 110 to 112 is provided with a predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types. The slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

《Types of winning roles》
The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination, a replay combination, and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In the game, an internal winning combination is determined by lottery at the start of the game, and the winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination is possible in the game. Depending on the combination, the result of internal winning may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of game status》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the state changes to change the degree of advantage to improve the interest of the game.

《Overview of processing》
Processing of the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the present embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (virtual number of medals) is used without using actual medals. number” shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including the MY counter, which will be described later) are initialized. , permits the WDT 314 to operate, sets initial values, and the like. Note that the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized when the setting is changed. Also, when it is determined that the backup data in the RAM 308 is abnormal in the recovery process, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been completed normally is sent to the medal count control section 350 .

In step S102, medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (lottery for a combination) is performed using this and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. , to determine internally elected hands. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302 .

In step S106, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 . In step S109, a medal awarding process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, details of the medal insertion/start lever reception processing (step S102) in the game control unit main processing of FIG. 82 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interruption time waiting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If the operation of the setting key is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if the operation of the setting key is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, processing for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350 . If the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever reception processing is terminated.

In step S1010, the current bet number (current bet number) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number). If the current bet number is smaller than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1011, and if the current bet number is equal to or greater than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, processing during medal insertion is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of the processing during medal insertion will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is the start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is terminated.

Next, details of the processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception processing of FIG. 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. This figure is a flow chart of the process during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the checkout button 134 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the operation of the checkout button 134 has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, a checkout button process is executed, and this process during medal insertion ends. Details of the settlement button process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not any of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been operated. If the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has not been accepted, the processing during medal insertion ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1106. This requested number is a value used for setting the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350 .

In step S1106, the current bet amount and the maximum bet amount (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current bet amount is not equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet amount is equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1107, a value obtained by subtracting the current bet amount from the maximum bet amount is set as the required number of coins, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation are the one bet button 130 or not. If the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation are the one bet button 130, the process proceeds to step S1109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

From step S1105 to step S1109, the requested number of coins becomes 0 if the current bet number is the maximum bet number. Also, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, if the maximum bet amount is 3 and the current bet amount is 0, the requested number is 3, and if the current bet amount is 1. , the requested number is 2, and if the current bet number is 2, the requested number is 1. Further, when the bet-one button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the requested number of bets becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is an input command.

In step S1111, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. The details of the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is waited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1113, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number is added to the current bet amount, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this processing during medal insertion ends.

Next, details of the checkout button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, this settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is the settlement command.

In step S1205, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control section is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1206. The details of the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the response to the command sent in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", this settlement button processing ends.

At step S1207, the current bet number is set to 0, and the settlement button process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion processing of FIG. ), and variation information transmission processing (step S1605) addressed to the medal count control unit in the medal awarding processing of FIG. 84, 85, and 89. This figure is a flow chart of the variation information transmission processing (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605) addressed to the medal count control unit.

First, in step S1301, which is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control section 350, but if it is not overwritten (no response), it indicates "abnormal".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is some kind of error status, this processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (a value corresponding to 100 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the response wait timer, and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. The details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal count control section 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

At step S1310, if the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the result is otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the reception result of the response from the medal number control section 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 87, the details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control section of FIG. 86 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1404, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1405, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command serial number is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control section 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1408, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1409, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 88, priority command transmission processing (step S1014) to the medal count control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception processing of FIG. 83 and priority command transmission to the medal count control unit in the triple command transmission processing of FIG. Details of the command transmission processing (steps S1403, S1406, and step S1409) will be described. 83 and 87. This figure is a flow chart of the priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) addressed to the medal count control section in FIGS.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section, and this priority command transmission processing addressed to the medal number control section ends.

Next, using FIG. 89, details of the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 82 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal giving process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1601, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the payout number is set as the requested number, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (FIG. 86) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the response to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1607, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process ends.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals overflows (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

<< Game control unit timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the game control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part timer interruption process.

The game control unit 302 is provided with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49 ms in this embodiment). load processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing is performed to deal with various errors such as an abnormality in the state of communication with the medal count control section 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door. If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control section 350 .

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, a medal count control command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S207, game control command transmission processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S208, effect command transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main processing of the game control unit 302, timer interrupt processing, etc. are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 consists of 16 bits. ~ 14 are command types (for example, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 to 139 operation acceptance) First to third press commands, first to third stop commands associated with stopping the reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands accompanying medal payout processing, game state update commands, etc.), bits 0 to Reference numeral 10 consists of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the game control unit 302, and is included in the output schedule information Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities and medal payout abnormalities is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, various lamps 336 and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 every 100 ms. This security command contains VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. , information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal has been received (power cutoff has been detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if a low voltage signal has not been received (power cutoff has not been detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, a timer interrupt termination process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. Then, it returns to the game control part main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power supply status is set to "normal".

Next, details of disconnection determination processing, which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 90, will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG.

First, in step S2001 executed first, if the value of the disconnection determination timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the disconnection determination timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2003, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process ends. In step S2006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is some error status, this disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal count control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 92, the details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG.

First, in step S2101 executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal count control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is OFF, this medal count control command reception processing is terminated.

In step S2102, the information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal count control section 350. FIG. These commands include six types of medal count control state commands (Fig. 78) and response commands (Fig. 80(b)), and the command type can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the upper byte of the received command is referenced to identify the command type, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is some error status, this medal number control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command containing an error code (an error code in the medal count control section 350), the error code is set as the error status. If there is no error in the medal number control section 350, an error code indicating normality is set in the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, using FIG. 93, the details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be described. The figure is a flow chart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control section 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 77) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 77, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted in order from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350 . The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information to be targeted by this command are read out to generate the transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control section 350, the last command (command transmitted 41st) is a check generated based on the transmission contents of the commands up to that point. It has become Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the updated checksum is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350 are output to the medal number control section 350 (the I/O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal number control section 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209 which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control section 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control section 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

At step S2211, the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

<<Medal number control unit main processing>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the medal count control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal count control section 350 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal count control section.

As described above, the medal count control section 350 is provided with an activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs an activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the medal number control section main processing shown in FIG.

When power is turned on, power-on processing is first performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9 V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and an interrupt period is set. be done. In addition, communication circuit settings and the like are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. The details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S303, preparation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparatory processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In step S304, processing for transmitting gaming machine information notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S306, reception confirmation processing of the rental notice is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a lending reception result response transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal count control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in RAM 358, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power failure. , and if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal, and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 96, the normal RAM clear processing has the fewest clear targets. In the RAM 358, in addition to the area for storing information during the game, an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information on the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and an area for storing information received from the game control unit 302 Although there is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, in normal RAM clear processing, the area that mainly stores the information during the game is cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear processing, the all-RAM clear processing has the largest number of objects to be cleared, and clears the entire area as shown in FIG.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.
In step S3008, if the number of game medals clear button 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to ON.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination processing is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not the game control unit RAM clear command of the game control priority command shown in FIG. 80(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3020.

At step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command is information indicating clearing "normal", the process proceeds to step S3018, and if not information indicating "normal", the process proceeds to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 96, the areas excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, and the like are cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information and the like is cleared.

In step S3020, if the information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021. do.

In step S3021, information (error code E8) indicating "RAM defect" is set as the error request set value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. The details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process and the like of FIG. 95 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95 and the like.

First, in step S3101 executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code is already set, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3102, the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

At step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process proceeds to step S3104; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3104, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

At step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 76B, the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

At step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the error request setting process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 98, details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal count control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG.

First, in step S3201 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of medal number control section 350 is updated. These pieces of information are stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, while the game control chip ID acquisition flag is ON, this processing is repeatedly executed, and when the game control chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine information notification interval timer. In step S3303, a value corresponding to 90 ms is set as the count notification interval timer value.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3306, preparations for transmission of various game machine information corresponding to the game machine information type are made. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is prepared, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prepared, and the game is played. If the device information type value is 2, preparations are made for transmission of hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information.

At step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the number of payout medals is set to zero.

At step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various types of gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b)) are sequentially transmitted. It should be noted that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, using FIG. 100, the details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process of FIG. 99 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG.

First, in step S3401 executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3403, 1 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

At step S3404, 2 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition processing ends.

In step S3406, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

In step S3407, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 101, the details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG.

First, in step S3501, which is executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment) is set to the rental notification interval timer.

From step S3503 to step S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the expected number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for count determination is set as the counted number.

In step S3512, the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3514, the value of the number of counted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the number of counted medals is added to the total number of medals counted. In step S 3518 , the total number of medals counted is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

In step S3519, the checksum is sent to the lending machine 700. FIG. The checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the lending machine 700 in this counting notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the count serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notice reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the lending notice reception flag is off, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends.

In step S3602, if the value of the rental notification interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

At step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the flow advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state.

In step S3604, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this lending notification reception confirmation processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 103, the details of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described. 94. This figure is a flow chart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG.

First, in step S3701 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the lending machine communication error counter.

In step S3702, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the loaned number of sheets reception result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3704; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the rental serial number is set as the rental serial number for confirmation. The check lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 106), and this step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the lending serial number for confirmation is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

From step S3707 to step S3711, the message length, command type, normal lending sequence number, lending number receipt result, and checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700 . Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of the previous transmission.

At step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending receipt result response transmission process ends.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission in steps S3707 to S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned tokens is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process is terminated.

《Timer interrupt processing of medal number control section》
Next, referring to FIG. 104, the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of the medal number control unit.

The medal number control section 350 has a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is started at predetermined intervals.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the WDT count value does not exceed the initial set value and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). (Once every 0.745 ms, which is the interrupt period).

In step S403, input port state update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port state update process, the input contents for the I/O input port are stored in the signal state storage area within the RAM 358 .

In step S404, lending notification reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S405, update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S408, processing for transmitting a medal number control command addressed to the game control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S409, a display device display process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers in units of time.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main processing of the medal count control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power supply status is set to "normal". It should be noted that the same processing (step S214 in FIG. 90) is executed when the game control unit 302 also detects the interruption of the power supply, but the processing here ends before the processing on the game control unit 302 side ends. If you do so, the command from the game control unit 302 cannot be received. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring in the present embodiment, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the processing here is terminated after the processing on the game control section 302 side is completed.

Next, using FIG. 105, the details of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG.

First, in step S4001 executed first, the lending notice reception flag is set to off.

In step S4002, if a rental notification from the rental machine 700 has been received, the process advances to step S4003; otherwise, this rental notification reception processing is terminated.

In step S4003, the information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the rental notification is stored in RAM 358 .

In step S4004, a lending number determination process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4005, the determination result of step S4004 is set as the loan number receipt result.

In step S4006, the lending notice reception flag is set to ON, and this lending notice reception processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 106, the details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification reception process of FIG. 105 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in FIG.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received rental notification data.

In step S4103, the checksum value included in the received rental notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102. End the process.

In step S4104, the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is compared with the value of the lending serial number for confirmation stored in the RAM 358. If the two are equal, the flow advances to step S4105. End the number-of-sheets determination process. If the previous lending notice was normally received, the lending serial number for confirmation here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103 (the updated lending serial number received last time). .

In step S4105, if each information of the message length and command type of the received rental notification is information corresponding to the rental notification, it is determined to be normal, and the process proceeds to step S4106. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rented sheets included in the received rent notice is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

At step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15000, the process proceeds to step S4108.

In step S4108, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine information type value of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification is 2, that is, whether or not the gaming machine information notification is about hall control/illegal monitoring information. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109.

In step S4109, if the value of the number of counted sheets in the previously transmitted count notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination processing ends.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rented cards included in the received rent notification is 50 or less, the flow advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the loaned number determination processing ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and the lending number determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 107, the details of the counted number update processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the medal number control section of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S405) in FIG.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if the flag is off, this update processing for the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the same button is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the count long-press timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S4206, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 500 ms in this embodiment) is set to the value of the count long press timer, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the count long-press timer value is 1, the process proceeds to step S4208, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

In step S4209, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (the count button 171 was released), the process proceeds to step S4211; otherwise, this update processing of the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long-press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process is terminated.

In step S4213, the count long-press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, 0 is set to the value of the count long-press timer.

In step S4215, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the game control section command reception processing (step S406) in the medal count control section timer interrupt processing of FIG. 104 will be described. The figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in FIG.

First, in step S4301 executed first, if the switch from off to on of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, proceed to step S4302, otherwise this game control unit command reception processing exit.

In step S4302, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 190 ms) is set to the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control state command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not the game control state command (game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4304, game control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4305, game control priority command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, using FIG. 109, details of the game control state command reception processing (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception processing of FIG. 108 will be described. The figure is a flowchart of the game control state command receiving process (step S4304) in FIG.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal count control section 350, and the final command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. It is a command to send sum. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the content of the received command, and the game control state command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4404, the value of the checksum updated by the content of the 1st to 40th command in step S4403 and the value of the checksum included in the command received from the game control unit 302 are compared, and if both are equal, it is normal. It determines, it progresses to step S4405, and if both differ, this game control state command reception processing will be complete|finished.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

At step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a)) is set in the RAM 358 among the contents of the command reception buffer.

At step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408 match, the process proceeds to step S4410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4414.

At step S4410, the value of the game machine installation information buffer (the value of the game machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c)) is set in the RAM 358 among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer.

At step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer. The values of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) are set in the RAM 358 by steps S4411 and S4412.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request set value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111, details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 108 will be described. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG.

First, in step S4501 executed first, if a triple command has been received, the process advances to step S4502, and if a command other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. As described above, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. is a triple command. That is, among the game control priority commands, if the above triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if the error occurrence command, RAM clear command, start lever reception command excluding these commands is received, the step of FIG. 111 The process proceeds to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process advances to step S4504; otherwise, the process advances to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 to store the contents thereof in the reception buffer, and when the last command is received, the process advances to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the reception buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 and the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command are compared. If different, this game control priority command reception processing is terminated.

In step S4507, if the later-described game control command serial number update flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4510. In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer and the value of the game control command serial number (game control command serial number updated in the previous S4511 (command serial number for judgment)) are equal, step S4511 , and if the two are different, the process proceeds to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is terminated.

At step S4514 in FIG. 111, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S4515; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. In this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

At step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process proceeds to step S4517; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process proceeds to step S4519; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4520.

In step S4519, settlement command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process proceeds to step S4521; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process proceeds to step S4523; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4524.

In step S4523, a payout command reception process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4523, error occurrence command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, details of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG.

First, in step S4601 executed first, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

At step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the flow advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, this input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the three consecutive commands), the process proceeds to step S4605; End the reception process.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the current bet value.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 113, the details of the settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this settlement command reception process ends.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "unmatched number of sheets to be settled" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this settlement command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 114, the details of the start lever reception command reception processing (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG.

First, in step S4801 executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON.

At step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the game interval abnormality timer.

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set to the type information set value, and in subsequent step S4805 the value of the received command (current bet number in the game control unit 302) is set to the count information set value. be. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the renting machine 700 .

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever reception command reception processing is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4807, information (error code E5) indicating "game interval abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is terminated.

Next, details of the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process of FIG. 114 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIGS.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, 1 is added to the number of game information.

At step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, as type information 1, the type information set value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114 or step S4A14 in FIG. 116) is set.

In step S4904, the value of the count information set value is set as count information 1, and the game information setting process is terminated. Here, when the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 114 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 116 is set as type information 1. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114) is set as type information 2. FIG.

In step S4906, the value of the count information set value (the value set in step S4805 of FIG. 114) is set as count information 2, and the game information setting process is terminated.

Note that the type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided for transmitting information on both of them in case the game is started quickly after the payout (within the period of transmission to the lending machine 700). It is a thing. That is, when the payout information (step S4A14 in FIG. 116, etc.) is set in the type information 1 and the count information 1, the current betting information (step S4804 in FIG. 114, etc.) is set to the type information 2 and the count information 2. may be set to It should be noted that, from the start of the game to the payout, the reels rotate and stop, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be transmitted to the lending machine 700 (cleared). 2 and the count information is never set to 2.

Next, using FIG. 116, the details of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, game medal clear detection information is cleared.

At step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, the process proceeds to step S4A04, and if the regame has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, 0 is set to the additional value for the number of game medals.

In step S4A05, information (error code E4) indicating "abnormal number of payouts" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A08, the game medal addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands). In step S4A09, information (error code E2) indicating "abnormal game order" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A11, game medal overflow confirmation processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process proceeds to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

At step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set to the type information set value.

In step S4A15, if the player wins the replay role, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is set as the count information set value. The first command of the payout commands here includes the number of payouts in the game control section 302, and the number of payouts is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is transmitted to the renting machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

At step S4A17, the current bet number is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current bet number is set as the count information set value. The information set here is transmitted to the renting machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 115 is executed, and this payout command reception process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 117, details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG.

First, in step S4B01 executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation processing is terminated. In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 118, the details of the error occurrence command reception processing (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG.

First, in step S4C01 executed first, an error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal number control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error of the game control unit 302 is preferentially processed.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C03.

At step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating "abnormal game order" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

At step S4C05, if information (error code E8) indicating "medal count control RAM error" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C07.

At step S4C07, if information (error code rE) indicating "game control RAM failure" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, this error generation command reception process ends.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and the error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 110).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG.

First, in step S4D01 executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04. In step S4D02, information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the same value is not 1, this error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, the error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D06, information (error code E9) indicating "rental machine communication error" is set as the error request setting value.

At step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and the error monitoring process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 120, the details of the game control unit addressed medal number control command transmission process (step S408) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the game control unit addressed medal count control command transmission process (step S408) in FIG.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, information on the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the above-described power-on flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the same flag is on, this game control unit addressed medal count control command transmission process is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be transmitted to the game control unit 302 (insertion command reception processing in FIG. 112, settlement command reception processing in FIG. 113 or response command set in either payout command reception processing in FIG. 116) is set. If not, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if any response command is set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal number control state commands (six types of commands) described with reference to FIG. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the target information of this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper bytes and lower bytes and transmitted using two of the six types of commands. Among them, the value of the number of game medals obtained when the previous command was transmitted is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insertion command reception process of FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process of FIG.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any one of the insertion command reception process of FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control section 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 is cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

At step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. This value is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is output to the game control unit 302, and the processing for transmitting the medal number control command addressed to the game control unit ends. The information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, using FIG. 121, the details of the indicator display processing (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG.

First, in step S4F01 executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if the two values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the number of display game medals.

In step S4F05, 1 is subtracted from the number of display game medals.

In step S4F06, a value corresponding to 4 ms is set as the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display device display processing is terminated.

<<Modification 1>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as Modified Example 1) of processing relating to medal insertion will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. FIG. FIG. 122 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 84, FIG. 123 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 122, step S1121 is provided between steps S1107 and S1108 in the processing shown in FIG. 84, and step S1122 is provided between steps S1109 and S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 84 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the content of the response is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modification shown in FIG. 123, step S1402 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. 87, and step S1421 is provided. This processing will be described below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 124, step S4603 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4604, and step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4621, the information of the input number limitation flag included in the received command (the first command among the three consecutive commands) is referred to. If the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622. The process advances to step S4623.

In step S4622, for the received command value storing the value of the requested number included in the received command (the first command of the triple commands), that value is set as the number of game medals, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value storing the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this input command receiving process ends.

<<Modification 2>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 2) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 125 . FIG. 125 is a modification of the scheduled number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 125, step S4204 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long-press timer is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171. FIG.

In step S4222, the number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the count button 171. FIG.

<<Modification 3>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 126 . FIG. 126 is a modification of the planned number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 126, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. Further, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4232, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value corresponding to 2.0 seconds, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic count flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4210, and if the same flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-controller 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 127(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 127(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 127(d).

In step S509, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a shutter control instruction in the effect data read out in step S509, the shutter control corresponding to this instruction is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed for setting transmission of a control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the performance data read out in step S509, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 127(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302 . In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 127(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 127(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S515, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 127(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 127(d). This figure is a flowchart of the command processing (step S507) in FIG. 127(a).

First, in step S541 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S543; otherwise, the command processing is terminated.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 128(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 128(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 128(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 128(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S609, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the performance data read out in step S609, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 128(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S603. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 128(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S623, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S625, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S631, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Description of operation>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below.

[Operation at power-on]
In the medal count control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clear processing is performed, and the state at the time of power off is restored (determination of Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 95). When the power is turned on for the first time, the initial state is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (determination of No in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored in the RAM failure information, so that information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in steps S3006 and S3020 of FIG. 95). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 97). This error information is transmitted to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 120), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIGS. 92 and 83). The game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if an error is received from the medal number control unit 350. FIG. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, so that various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit state command is received (Fig. 95 step S3007, step S4407 in FIG. 109: Yes determination).

Also, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 82). The medal count control section 350 that receives this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control section 302 (Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 95). In this case, the medal number control unit 350 temporarily permits the interrupt processing, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, prohibits the interrupt processing and performs subsequent processing. It is possible to reliably execute the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 95). Further, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while the interrupt is enabled, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 95).

In addition, the number of game medals can be initialized in the number of game medals control unit 350 by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (determination of YES in step S3008 of FIG. 95). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the game medal count clear detection information. (FIG. 99). The game medal clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 116).

[Transmission of game control state command (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)] In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control state commands (see FIG. 77) are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350. . Specifically, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are sequentially transmitted one by one to the medal count control unit. It is set in the buffer (Yes in step S2201 of FIG. 93). However, when the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After the game control state command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (step S2208 in FIG. 93). judgment of Yes). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control section 350 receives the command. The strobe signal is turned off in the next interrupt process, and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No in step S2208 in FIG. 93), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as it is. . This makes it possible to stabilize reception of commands on the medal number control section 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (determination of Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 93). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time the interrupt process is executed. In addition, the transmission state continues for 1.49 ms (however, the output of the command itself continues for 2.98 ms), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (0.745 ms interrupt processing twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in the timer interrupt processing, but the game control priority command is prioritized according to the game situation in the game control unit main processing. It is sent to the number control unit 350 . More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the process of the game control command transmission process (FIG. 93), the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is is set in the transmission buffer), by setting the game control priority command in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing, this game control priority command is given priority over the game control state command and the number of medals control unit 350. Game control priority commands include an insertion command associated with the operation to insert game medals, a settlement command associated with the operation to settle the game medals currently set in the bet amount, a start lever acceptance command associated with acceptance of the start lever operation, and a game medal There are a payout command associated with payout, an error occurrence command associated with error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with RAM clear (FIG. 80(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command each consist of three commands. Among these, the first command is a command containing information on the number of game medals to be targeted, the second command is a command containing the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is the previous command. A command containing a checksum based on the contents of two commands. Since these commands are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands, they are sometimes referred to as triple commands. Also, the values of the high-order bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

If the response command from the medal number control section 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control section 350 includes information indicating "request", the command is resent. (Determination of No in step S1308 in FIG. 86, determination of No in step S1310), if the upper limit number of retransmissions is exceeded, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal count control unit 350. (NO in steps S1302 and S1306).

In addition, when information other than "request" is included in the response command from the medal number control section 350, this information is set in the response result from the medal control section, and the command serial number is incremented by 1 (Fig. 86 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (transmission of the insertion command, etc.)]
When a game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals requested by this operation (requested number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 84). In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a betting operation using two types of bet buttons, ie, a 1 bet button and a MAX bet button. When the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required for setting the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 84), and when the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is added to the requested number. It is set (step S1109 in FIG. 84). However, when the current bet amount is the maximum bet amount, the required number of coins is set to 0 by the input operation (determination of No in step S1106 in FIG. 84).

Subsequently, a command (the first command among the commands constituting the insertion command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an insertion command and lower byte data indicating the value of the number of requested medals is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 84, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. This command is sent to the medal number control section 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and further, 1 is added to the upper byte data It is added and updated to the value indicating the second command, and the command (the second command among the commands constituting the input command) consisting of lower byte data indicating the command serial number is stored in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88). Then, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the processing (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and further, 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. value, and a command (the third command among the commands constituting the insertion command) consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 87). ˜S1411, FIG. 88). Then, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the next game control command transmission processing of the game control section timer interrupt processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93).

The insertion command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 84).

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is given (the replay flag is ON), the processing of the input command is not executed (determination of No in step S1104 in FIG. 84).

Also, during the period from when the input command is transmitted until when the response command is received from the medal count control unit 350, the input command is not transmitted even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 84 is the response command received). (Wait until the

Also, when the bet button is operated, the command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 regardless of whether or not a response command to the input command is received, and regardless of the contents of the response command from the medal number control unit 350. (step S1114 in FIG. 84). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet amount is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current bet amount can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current bet amount is set as the number of game medals requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 of FIG. 84, step S1203 of FIG. 85).

Subsequently, a command (the first command among the commands constituting the settlement command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 85, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. This command is sent to the medal number control section 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that for the input command, the description thereof will be omitted.

The settlement command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 in the above flow. If the response command to this command includes information indicating "normal", the value of the current bet number is set to 0. It is set (determination of Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 85).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after receiving the response command (when the response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is decremented). In the state before receiving the response command, the current bet value has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added in the medal number control section 350 which received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If no response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is not decremented and an error occurs (determination of No in step S1206 in FIG. 85), but this error is avoided by some means. In this case, the value of the current bet amount is not subtracted. As a result, the number of medals increases by the amount added to the number of game medals by the medal number control unit 350, and the game medals are obtained illegally by the settlement operation. It will be. Therefore, the current bet value may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is transmitted, and a configuration may be adopted in which a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command not used). In addition, although there is a possibility that errors in the communication state cannot be detected in this configuration that does not use the response command, communication quality is not degraded because errors in the communication state can be detected by adopting a configuration that uses the response command for the input command. can be made It should be noted that command indexes may be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350, and an error may occur when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an operation based on incorrect information.

Note that, when receiving a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the medal number control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and give an error. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Incidentally, when the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16, the settlement may not be accepted and an error may be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Incidentally, when the medal number control section 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16384, the settlement may not be accepted and an error may be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is granted (the replay flag is ON), the above-described settlement command processing is not executed (determination of No in step S1202 in FIG. 85).

Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 regardless of whether or not the settlement command has been transmitted, and regardless of the content of the response command from the medal count control section 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 85). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the checkout button 134 .

[Operation of game control unit 302 by start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is equal to or greater than the startable number, the upper byte data indicating the start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 83). Further, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 83). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of the number of payouts is set to the number of game medals requested for the payout (requested number of medals) (step S1602 in FIG. 89). Subsequently, a command (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. This command is sent to the medal number control section 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that of the input command, the explanation is omitted. The payout command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. command is transmitted (step S1607 in FIG. 89). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals overflows and the payout cannot be accepted. 1 to the sub-controller 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 89). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. It should be noted that, if the overflow state is not resolved, retransmission of the payout command is repeated, and the game cannot proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 . When the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can proceed. In other words, when the game cannot be progressed due to overflow, the player himself/herself can deal with it without calling a clerk.

[Operation when medal number control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 92), the type of this command (game control state command (FIG. 78) or response command (FIG. 80) (b)) is identified, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the command type (step S2102 in FIG. 92). Also, if the command received here is a command containing an error code, on condition that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set, this error code is an error in the game control unit 302 The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 92).

[Send medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal count control state commands (see FIG. 78) are transmitted to the game control section 302. FIG. Specifically, one medal number control state command is sent by the medal number control command transmission processing (step S408 in FIG. 104, FIG. 120) to the game control unit in the medal number control unit timer interrupt processing of the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit one by one (determination of Yes in step S4E04 of FIG. 120). However, when the response command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 first, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S4E04 in FIG. 120).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are then output to the game control section 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 120). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 120), the game control section 302 side will receive the command. In managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that adds 1 for each interrupt within the range of 0 to 7 is used. 4 to 7 are set to OFF (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 120). The transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 120). That is, in the medal number control section 350, one command is transmitted while the interrupt processing is executed eight times, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every time the interrupt processing is executed four times. . In addition, the transmission state continues for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4 times), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (1.49 ms interrupt processing twice), so the command It is possible to prevent spillage.

[Operation when game control state command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control state command, game control state command reception processing (FIG. 108 step S4304, FIG. 109) is executed.

As for the game control state command, 41 types of commands (FIG. 77) are sequentially transmitted, but the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 of FIG. 109). judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the content is normal, the checksum is cleared, and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 109, S4410 to S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in the RAM matches the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer. (Yes in step S4409 of FIG. 109). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 109). Also, when all the RAMs are cleared in the medal number control section 350, the chip IDs stored in the RAMs have already been cleared. update processing is executed (game control unit chip ID acquisition flag ON in FIG. 95, determination of No in step S4407 in FIG. 109).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control priority command, game control priority command reception processing (FIG. 108 step S4305, FIGS. 110 and 111) are executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error generation command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are once stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 110), the third command , the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer. (steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 110).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is ON, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF (Fig. 110 determination of Yes in step S4507). It should be noted that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which a command serial number error occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 118).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 110). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 86, step S4511 in FIG. 110), these values will match if there is no abnormality. If these values do not match, the error code E3 is set in the error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 110).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

[Operation when input command is received]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, an input command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 111, FIG. 112). In this processing, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of inserted medals) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the number of inserted medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the current bet number, After the requested number of medals to be inserted is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 112). When the requested number of inserted medals is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (determination of No in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 112). The number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (step S3509 in FIG. 101). It is set (determination of No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 112).

[Operation when settlement command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 111, FIG. 113). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 113). If the current bet amount is 0, the number of bills requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, and after the number of bills requested for settlement is added to the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (determination of Yes in step S4702 of FIG. 113). The number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4702 in FIG. 113).

[Operation when the start lever acceptance command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 114). If this flag is not set to ON, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 114), the initial value is set to the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 114), further game information is set 114 is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 114). Here, 11H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates the reception of the start lever. Also, the current bet number is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by accepting the start lever is stored as game information. The game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99). In addition, when the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4802 of FIG. 114). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 82) in the game control unit 302. By using this timer also in the medal count control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving payout command]
When the received game control priority command is a payout command, the number of game medals clear detection information is first cleared. This information is information set by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on, and this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when this payout command is received. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not ON, an error code E2 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4A02 of FIG. 116). This flag is a flag that is set to ON when the start lever acceptance command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever acceptance command has not been received. Used for fraud prevention.

Next, if the player has won the replay, 0 is set to the game medal addition value (step S4A04 in FIG. 116). In cases other than replay wins, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) is 15 or less, the number of payouts and the additional value for the number of game medals are set to the number of payouts (Fig. 116). steps S4A07, S4A08). The number of paid-out medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 99). If the payout number is greater than 15, an error code E4 is set as an error request (NO in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 116).

Subsequently, game medal count overflow confirmation processing is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 116, FIG. 117). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is 16383 or less, which is the upper limit value of the number of game medals for payout, this total value is taken as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. Information is set (determination of Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 117). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit of the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117). Regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as will be described later (see [Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]), in the actual operation, the number of game medals is the actual threshold value. If the actual threshold value is exceeded, the output cannot be increased (response command "abnormal"), and if the actual threshold is not exceeded, the output can be increased (response command "normal"). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not need to be the same as the determination value for processing.

If information indicating “abnormality” is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process is terminated, and this response command is transmitted to the game control unit 302 .

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 116). Further, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 116). Here, 21H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates that there was a payout. Also, the number of payouts (the current number of bets in the case of a replay win) is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. The game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99).

[Notification of gaming machine information (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, the game machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S304 in FIG. 94, FIG. 99). This game machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a game machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 99). In addition, 90 ms is set to the counting notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the counting notification executed after the game machine information notification is transmitted (step S3303 in FIG. 99).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set in the number of game medals for count determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (moving the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set to the number of game medals for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 99).

Next, the gaming machine information type is obtained (step S3305 in FIG. 99, FIG. 100). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and as this gaming machine information, one of three types of gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected (Fig. 75). (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information is selected, when the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 100). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at intervals of about 60 seconds, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at intervals of about 180 seconds, and otherwise 2 is set to the gaming machine information type. . That is, in the game machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the game machine information mainly includes hall control/fraud monitoring information, but the game machine installation information is included in the game machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the game machine information is notified at intervals of about 180 seconds. The gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. Data to be notified of gaming machine information (FIGS. 75(a) and (b)), including gaming machine information corresponding to these gaming machine information types, is set in the lending machine destination transmission buffer (step S3306 in FIG. 99). ), and sequentially transmitted (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 99). It should be noted that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 99).

Hall con/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes game information corresponding to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid-out medals, and the number of game information. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (determination of Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 99).

[Counting notification (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S305 in FIG. 94, FIG. 101). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed after 90 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 99, step S3501 in FIG. 101).

In the count notification transmission process, the data to be counted ((a) and (c) in FIG. 75) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 101). , S3519). Note that the counting serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 101).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted. When the number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (determination of No in step S3508 in FIG. 101, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 101). On the other hand, when a value other than 0 is set as the number to be counted, the number to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101), and the number of game medals is subtracted (FIG. 101). step S3514). It should be noted that the setting of the count number and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state in which the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 101). Note that the scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update processing of the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control section (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107).

[Setting the number of medals to be counted (medal number control unit 350)]
In the medal number control section 350, the processing for updating the scheduled number of medals to be counted is executed in the medal number control section timer interrupt processing (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107). The number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the set number of sheets to be counted in this process, and a count notification including this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

First, the case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 107), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the key was pressed), the count button 171 is released. The long press flag is not set to ON (Yes is not determined in step S4207 of FIG. 107). When the count button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the number of sheets to be counted (determination of Yes in step S4210 in FIG. 107, step S4212).

Next, the case where the count button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or longer will be described. In this case, an initial value is set in the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 107), and when the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the key was pressed), the count long-press flag is set to ON and counts. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (determination of Yes in step S4207 in FIG. 107). After that, while the count button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long-press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and the number of sheets to be counted based on this scheduled number of sheets is counted each time the counting notification is sent. will be set. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is released while the counting long-press flag is ON, the counting long-pressing flag is set to OFF, the counting long-pressing timer is set to 0, and the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 107). determination of Yes, determination of No in step S4211).

[Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
Upon receiving the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the medal number control section 350 updates the content of the RAM based on the content of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 105). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification matches the checksum included in the rental notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 106). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lending serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the lending serial number included in the lending notice (step S4104 in FIG. 106). The lending serial number for confirmation holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notice (step S3706 in FIG. 103), and is configured so that these values match when communication is normal. It is Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. When an abnormality is determined by these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of rented sheets included in the rent notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 106). On the other hand, if the number of rented sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (determination of No in step S4106 in FIG. 106).

First, if the number of game medals is 15000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, when the number of game medals is 15000 or more, it is configured so that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it is possible to increase by lending. In realizing this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is allowed. will behave the same. Also, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase by lending. In other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the operation is the same as in the present embodiment. As described above, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value (14999 in the above case), the increase due to lending cannot be performed. , Any value may be used as long as there is a value that becomes the actual threshold, and any processing may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment). For example, the actual threshold does not need to be the same as the determination value for processing do not have.

Further, the above determination may be made based on the number of game medals to be added instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a real threshold value including the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. In other words, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value, the increase due to lending cannot be performed, and if the number of game medals does not exceed the actual threshold value, the increase due to lending can be performed.

Next, if the game machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4108 in FIG. 106). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2. FIG.

Next, if the number of counted sheets is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4109 in FIG. 106). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the loaned number is not 0, the number of game medals is added.

Finally, if the loaned number of sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4110 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets to be lent out per one time is set to 50.

If it is not determined as abnormal in the above determination, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 106).

The determination result of the above process is set to the loan number reception result, and the loan notice reception flag is set to ON (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 105).

In addition to the lending notification reception process described above, the medal count control unit 350 executes lending notification reception confirmation processing in the medal count control unit main processing (step S306 in FIG. 94, FIG. 102). In this lending notification reception confirmation process, it is checked whether the lending notification reception flag is turned on for 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 101, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 102). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification reception processing of the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control unit (step S404 in FIG. 104, FIG. 105).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the lending notification reception flag is not turned on within 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( step S3604 in FIG. 102). The value of this lending machine communication error counter is initialized when the lending machine reception result response transmission is executed (step S3701 in FIG. 103), but an error occurs when the value of the lending machine communication error counter becomes 1 (see FIG. 103). 119 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control section 350, if the lending notice reception flag is set to ON after the lending notice reception confirmation processing, lending receipt result response transmission processing is executed in the medal count control section main processing (step in FIG. 94). S308, FIG. 103).

In this lending reception result response transmission process, parameters related to lending machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 103).

Subsequently, if the lending number receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 103). Also, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is set as the lending serial number for confirmation, 1 is added to the value of the lending serial number for confirmation (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103). In other words, the value of the lending serial number for confirmation here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notice.

Subsequently, the data ((a) and (e) in FIGS. 103A and 105B) to be the target of the lending acceptance result response are set in the lending machine-addressed transmission buffer and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 103). With the above processing, if the loaned number receipt result is "normal", the currently received lending serial number is sent, and if the lending number receipt result is "abnormal", the previously received lending serial number is sent. . It should be noted that if the lending number reception result is "normal", the value of the lending number is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103).

[Operation for error (game control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 90). For example, if a strobe signal is not detected for a certain period of time when a command is sent from the medal count control section 350, a medal count control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 91). In the state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302 , the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350 . If the error status is set, a process of notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 83, step S1603 in FIG. 89). Therefore, an error on the side of the game control unit 302 is processed with priority over an error on the side of the medal number control unit 350. For example, if there is no error on the side of the game control unit 302, an error on the side of the medal number control unit 350 is notified. will be Also, the error status is sent to the medal count control section 350 by the error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 90).

[Operation in response to an error (medal count control unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 95, step S4414 in FIG. 109, step S4512 in FIG. 110, step S4706 in FIG. 113, step S4706 in FIG. 116, step S4A09 in FIG. 116, step S4D02 in FIG. 119, step S4D06 in FIG. 119, FIG. 97). Information of this error code is transmitted to the game control section 302 by means of a medal count control state command. In addition, when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 118). Thus, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal count control section 350 side.

[Modified example for input operation]
FIG. 122 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 84, FIG. 123 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be. The operation of these processes will be described below.

84, the required number of medals is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current bet number, and an insertion command including this information is transmitted to the medal number control section 350. (Fig. 87). On the other hand, in FIG. 122, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the input number limited flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 122), and the one bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limit flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 122). Then, an input command including the information of the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 (Fig. 123).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 124, if the number of game medals exceeds the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is changed. Returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command (determination of Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the input command receiving process of FIG. 124, if the number of game medals equal to or greater than the required number is not found, the input number limitation flag is referred (determination of No in step S4604 of FIG. 124). When the number-of-throwing-in limited flag is ON, the process for the requested number is not performed, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (determination of No in step S4621 in FIG. 124). In the game control section 302 which received this response command, the value returned by this response command, 0, is added to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122), so the current bet number is maintained without change. It will be.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 124, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the required number and the insertion number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the required number (see FIG. 124). YES is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in step S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the above modification, when the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested by the insertion command is not sufficient, 0 is returned for the requested number of medals if the number-of-insertion limited flag is on, and if the number-of-insertion limitation flag is off. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number of sheets. When the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot respond to the requested number of medals from the game control unit 302, this configuration uses information (the number of inserted limited flag) is transmitted together with the requested number of sheets. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration where the advantage changes depending on the difference in the current bet amount, it may be possible to prevent the current bet amount from becoming a disadvantageous value unintentionally.

In this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, a value necessary for setting the maximum bet number is set as the required number of bets. A configuration may be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets.

Also, for example, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the maximum bet number is set as the requested number of bets, if the one bet button 130 has been operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. If an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the requested number is transmitted by an operation, the medal number control unit 350 cannot accept the requested number (the maximum bet number is exceeded). Also in this case, the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot cope with the number of medals requested from the game control unit 302 . In such a case as well, by transmitting the information for proper use and the requested number of sheets together, the operation of not responding to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and the operation of responding as much as possible ( For example, return the maximum number of bets as a response command) can be used properly.

《Example of operation》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Operation example related to counting process]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a first example in which the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 129(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), time elapses from left to right. The same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), arrows with numerals corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 129(b) are shown. These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170 .

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), the timing at which the count notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counted number (the number of game values transmitted to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Further, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "count number". Furthermore, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown below it.

In the first example shown in FIG. 129, the operation of the counting button 171 is started in a state where the "number of game medals" is 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "250".

Even if the first counting timing comes after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the counting button 171 remains operated. Before long, 0.5 second (500 ms) has passed since the counting button 171 was started to be operated. Even when 0.5 seconds have passed, the counting button 171 is still operated, and a long-pressing operation is performed, and 50 is set as the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4209 of the planned number of sheets updating process shown in FIG. 107). ). In the following description, operation of the count button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is called long press, and operation of the count button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting operation is called short press. The scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. 107 is executed at a cycle of 0.7 ms. It continues to be overwritten to the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the operation of the count button 171, when the first count timing arrives while the count button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". This change display is performed by displaying a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms by the display processing shown in FIG. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 is suddenly changed from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. A display (a display performed before displaying the number of game medals after the number of game medals is reduced by 50, and a display for recognizing that the number of game medals will change) is performed. Then, when about 200 ms has passed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 129(b).

When the next counting timing arrives while the count button 171 is kept pressed, the number of counts is set again based on the value of the number of counts to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. A sheet count notification is sent again. The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "200" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, after about 200 ms has passed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 129(b).

Furthermore, when the timing for counting the third time arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed, the medal number control unit 350 sends a count notification of 50 medals to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is 50. Decrease to 100 sheets. After that, assume that the counting button 171 is released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 ends. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted (here, 50 sheets) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the “number of game medals” remains at 100 as well. Note that the change display is performed in a time (about 200 ms) shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms. , the operation of the count button 171 is terminated, the number of game medals corresponding to the number can be left.

Also, when the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing after the operation of the counting button 171 is started (when the hand is released at the timing of the arrow A shown in FIG. 129(a)), 1 is added to the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 107), and when the counting timing arrives, the one sheet is transmitted as a count notification. The “number of game medals” is reduced by one to 249, and the number “249” is displayed on the display device 170 for number of game medals.

Also, when the count button 171 is operated a plurality of times before the first count timing comes after the first operation of the count button 171 is started, that is, when the count button 171 is pressed a plurality of times before the count timing arrives. , the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by one each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the timing of counting arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (in this case, it corresponds to the number of times of single pressing), and the value of the number of times short-pressed until then is transmitted as a notification of counting.

On the other hand, when counting button 171 is released after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of counting button 171 and before the first counting timing has arrived (as indicated by arrow B in FIG. 129(a)). 107), even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "count" is 0 (a count notification indicating that the counted number of sheets is 0 is transmitted). Similarly, when the display of the number of game medals 170 changes from 250 to 200 in about 200 ms, and the count button 171 is released before the next count timing arrives (Fig. 129(a)). ), the count notification of 50 sheets is not transmitted, and the "count" value becomes 0 (the count notification of 0 is transmitted). ).

FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting.

FIG. 130 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272 . As described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a period of 100 ms contains information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the count button 171 is pressed for a short time and one card is counted, no display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that counting is being performed. , its display continues. Also, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272 . For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, the output is continued. If the count sound is output with a small number, it may be mixed with other effects sounds, and may give the player an expectation different from the expectation that the other effects sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If the number of counting sounds is large, the output time is long, so there is little possibility that the sound will be mixed with other sound effects, and there will be little influence on other sound effects. It should be noted that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be output in the same manner as when one sheet is counted.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is long pressed and 50 cards are counted, the effect image display device 157 displays a display notifying that counting is being performed, and the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound. . That is, as described above, the security command transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a period of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. In the first sub-control section 400, when information indicating 50 sheets is transmitted as the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, a counting sound is output. In addition, when the second sub-controller 500 also receives the information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the counted number of sheets via the first sub-controller 400, it displays the in-counting notification.

Furthermore, the long press continues, and during the continuous counting in which 50 sheets are counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. In addition, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound "piyopiyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or longer. Since the length of the counting sound output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and sounds like continuous output. For example, if the counting sound has a length of 0.5 seconds or more, it overlaps with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and the continuity is maintained, and the counting sound is generated in the continuous counting period. continue without interruption. It is recognized that continuous counting is being performed by the character display of "Continuous counting" and the continuous counting sound.

Note that when the counted number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10) of 2 or more and less than 50, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long pressing may be output. By doing so, for example, when the short press is repeated, it is possible to make the user recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, when the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 remains less than 50 (for example, 10 remaining) and the long press is performed, 10 are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there are only a few left from the change in the effect sound. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation was performed before the count button 171 was operated and the bet number was not zero. In this embodiment, operating the count button 171 does not change the value of the current bet, but in FIG. 131, if the current bet is not 0 when the count button 171 is operated, counting processing is executed. This is a modified example in which settlement processing (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrement to the number of game medals) is performed before.

In the example shown in FIG. 131, when the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the counting button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. will be

FIG. 131 shows the “current number of bets”, and below that, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Furthermore, below that, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is 3. The "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 has been reduced from 68 to 65 by subtracting 3 in response to this betting operation. Before long, instead of operating the start lever 135, the counting button 171 is operated. When the counting button 171 is operated, the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, first, the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to become 68. That is, the game returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After performing this cancellation, the counting process is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed long, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed, 50 medals are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases from 50 to 18 medals.

In this example, by operating the counting button 171, the current number of bets can be returned to the "number of game medals" without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. I will end up doing it. In this configuration, if it is desired to change only the current number of bets, the adjustment button 134 should be operated. For example, after betting 3 coins, if you want to change to betting 1 coin, operate the checkout button 134 to temporarily return the 3 coins that have been bet to the "number of game medals", and then bet again for betting 1 coin. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Note that the settlement button 134 may not be provided because the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 .

FIG. 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information indicating the counted number of coins included in the security command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets transmitted in the security command until the counted number of sheets transmitted reaches 0, and when it reaches 0 (when the counting is completed) Executes the counting end production with . The counting end effect here is an effect corresponding to the quantity of counting performed at once.

FIG. 132(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). On the effect image display device 157, during counting, a counting effect (for example, character display of "Continuous counting" and output of counting sound described with reference to FIG. 130) is performed. , the effect image display device 157 performs a counting end effect 1 in which a character display of "counting end" is displayed. On the other hand, FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 1000). When the counting of a predetermined number or more is finished, the counting end effect 2 is performed, and the effect image display device 157 adds a warning display of ``be careful not to store too much'' in addition to the character display of ``counting finished''.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store up to 16383 "game medal numbers". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear. Therefore, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal counts". Therefore, it is preferable to issue a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171 . The warning display described with reference to FIG. 132(b) is an example of notification for increasing the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and prompts the renting machine 700 to moderately transfer the game value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative counted number of sheets. For example, when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets), a counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative counted number of sheets reaches a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets) or more, the counting effect B is performed. shall be performed. Further, the counting performance A is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an appropriate state, and the counting performance B is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an inappropriate state. It is possible to give the player an unfavorable impression that the accumulated number of coins is large.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be described.

FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such a conventional slot machine, not only the betted medals but also the stored medals are included in the settlement process of real medals (for example, the maximum number of bets is 3 and the maximum number of stored medals is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be settled). When this settlement process ends, a demonstration command is output to the first sub-controller 400 , and the second sub-controller 500 may execute a process of displaying a demonstration screen on the effect image display device 157 . That is, there is a certain amount of time while the checkout process, which may involve the physical ejection of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command. Move to a demonstration production based on the command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require real medals, the object of settlement is the medals bet (current bet number, maximum 3), and physical medals are not ejected. The processing time related to settlement is a short amount of time. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time for payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-controller 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is made to execute an effect based on the execution of the settlement process, this effect will be performed only for a short time before the demonstration effect, and there is a risk that the player will conversely feel uncomfortable. There is

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 133, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, an effect based on this settlement button command is output. (output of settlement tone, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 133, when the bet operation is performed and the "current number of bets" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated to perform the settlement operation. By this settlement operation, the number of bets (three) is added to the "number of game medals", which increases from 65 to 68.

FIG. 133 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. Even if the settlement operation is performed, the settlement sound is not output from the speaker 272 . Further, the game background display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 133 is immediately switched to the demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demonstration command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration clearer.

It should be noted that the specification may be such that the settlement effect is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While the settlement performance is being executed, even if the demonstration performance is started, the settlement performance is continued so that both performances are executed together. Although it is expected that the frequency of settlement operations will be lower than in conventional slot machines, there is a possibility that settlement operations will be performed due to fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so there are settlement processes around. make it known.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes according to the length of operation time of the count button 171 will be described.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. Note that in this example, instead of the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 107, the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 125 is adopted.

FIG. 134(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long-press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. In this table, the count long-press timer value is set for each long-press step value. That is, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the counting long-press timer decreases by a predetermined time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the count long-press timer is shortened step by step. Then, when the value of the long-press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 134(b) is a table showing specific values of the planned number of sheets used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the planned number of sheets update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press step value. In other words, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted increases as the long-press step value increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases step by step according to the operation time of the counting button 171 . Note that even if the same value is set a plurality of times, the number of sheets to be counted will eventually increase step by step. For example, even if the values of the number of sheets to be counted are set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30 . Then, when the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted becomes a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 134(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long-press timer shown in FIG. 134(a) and the expected number of counted sheets shown in FIG. 134(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 134(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart is shown a timing chart showing the ON state when the count button 171 is being operated.

When the count button 171 is turned from OFF to ON, a count long-press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long-press stage value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and the timer is turned on. When the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value becomes "1", 10 sheets are set as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). When the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (a value for 0.9 seconds) with a long-press step value of 2 is set (step shown in FIG. 125). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.9 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, the 10 sheets set as the number to be counted will reach 0.9 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Subsequently, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long-press step value of 3 is set (shown in FIG. 125). step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.6 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, 20 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted will be counted at the timing of 0.6 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) with a long-press step value of 4 is set (step shown in FIG. 125). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.3 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, the timing of counting 30 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted arrives. will be counted by

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Thereafter, the count long-press timer is repeatedly set to a value of 0.3 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and the expected number of sheets to be counted is repeatedly set to 50 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, if the count button 171 is kept pressed, 50 sheets are counted every time the count timing comes.

In the example described here, as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As the time becomes longer, the value of the long-press timer for counting may become longer, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase. Alternatively, the value of the count long-press timer may be shortened, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may be decreased.

In addition, until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, the value set in the counting long-press timer is gradually shortened, and the value of the expected number of medals to be counted is gradually increased. You can

FIG. 135(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 134(c), after the long-press step value reaches 4, the count long-press timer value becomes constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the maximum number of sheets to be counted is constant at 50. become. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but when the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300), endgame processing is executed. You may make it The term "final stage processing" as used herein refers to a process of increasing the value of the count long-press timer and decreasing the value of the number of tokens to be counted as the number of game medals decreases.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 135(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long-press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the number of expected counts is set to 50, and the "number of game medals" is 299. "Number of game medals" is below a certain value (300).

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set again as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the count long-press timer value is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125) and becomes longer.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the value for 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125) and becomes longer again.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and is further lengthened.

Then, when the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set again as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). In addition, the number of sheets less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set again to the value for 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). Note that a value exceeding the value for 1.2 seconds (for example, the value for 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the counting long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 135(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches nine, the count button 171 is released and the count button 171 is turned off. As a result, counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage processing described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and the value of the count long-press timer increases. It is possible to reduce the number of "game medals" becoming 0. If it is desired to set the "number of game medals" to 0, the counting button 171 should be operated until the display of the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 135(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off when the number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 in the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(b), the count button 171 remains in operation even after the power is cut off until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, the medal number control unit 350 determines the maximum number of medals to be counted (50 in this example). ) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Even if control is once interrupted due to a power failure, continued operation of the counting button 171 for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets (for example, 30 sheets) that is slightly smaller than the maximum number of sheets may be set. Alternatively, the planned number of sheets to be counted at the time of power failure may be reset.

Also, although the description here is about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the long-press counting timer. That is, when power is restored while the count button 171 is being operated, the medal count control section 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the count long-press timer. (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).

FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example employing the update processing of the planned number of sheets shown in FIG.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released, and 0.3 seconds is counted. Each time the timing comes, 50 cards are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, the number of game medals can be quickly set to 0 by an operation that does not take time and effort.

It should be noted that when the automatic counting is started, the game medal number display device 170 does not perform the change display described with reference to FIG. go. In the 7-segment display, which is the game medal number display device 170, the change display in which 1 is decremented at intervals of about 4 ms is such that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to afterimages. It may look like Moreover, if the changing display is continued until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" becomes 0, the current display number may rather become difficult to understand. Players who select automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" to 0, and there may be little need to change the display to show that the number of game medals is being decremented by one. be.

In addition, since the player does not operate during the period when the automatic counting is performed, it is preferable to inform the player that the automatic counting is being performed by means of a lamp or the like. Also, if there is a payout based on the game result during the automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and is included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which the automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. When the counting button 171 is operated for 2.0 seconds, automatic counting is started, and 50 sheets are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 137(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also shown below the "count number". In this example, the counting button 171 is released when the "number of game medals" reaches 147, but the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting automatically ends, and the count button 171 must be operated. , the "number of game medals" will not decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. When it is desired to continue the game after the automatic counting, the game can be started quickly because there is a remaining number. There is also a case where it is desired to count all the number of game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. It should be noted that the certain value is set to 50, but the player may be allowed to set a certain value. For example, the player may be allowed to select 0, 20, or 50 sheets. A desired number of game medals can be left after counting. A certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, a certain value is set to 0 in a normal game state, and a certain value is set to 50 in a privilege game state such as during an AT game. Since the possibility of ending the game is low in the privilege game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. A certain value may be set according to the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, when less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and when 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for a prize such as a drink, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals. Also, the opposite is possible. When a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by executing a notification or the like to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals.

FIG. 137(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off during automatic counting and the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 137(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power failure occurs in a state in which 50 medals are being counted each time a counting timing of 0.3 seconds is reached by automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of the power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is operated while the power is off and the power is restored while being operated. , after the power is restored, an ON signal indicating the ON state of the count button 171 is detected. When this ON signal is detected when power is restored, automatic counting is started even if two seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not passed. That is, 50 sheets are counted when the first counting timing comes after the power is restored. Therefore, automatic counting is started even if the counting button 171 is released before two seconds have elapsed since the power was restored.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a display example indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 138 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 138 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the operation mode of the count button 171 (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, the characters "counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is being displayed. That is, the character display of "counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Also, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, the segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 138 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the automatic counting is started, the medal number control section 350 sends a command to the game control section 302 including the automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting in the counting number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted and the above automatic counting information in the security command. The second sub-controller 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-controller 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the characters "automatically counting" and the message 157m. In the state in which automatic counting is being performed, automatic counting state notification is provided. It should be noted that while the automatic counting is being performed, a notification may be given by sound or a lamp. In FIG. 138, the effect image display device 157 displaying the game background displays the character display of "automatically counting". Below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Even if you release the button, the counting continues." In the state in which automatic counting state notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, there is also an explanation such as "You can play games." In the state where the automatic counting state notification is being performed, the game progress possible notification is performed. It is notified that the game can be progressed by operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132 even during automatic counting. Note that operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted during the counting process. In addition, since it is anticipated that there will be a case where it is desired to manually end the automatic counting after the automatic counting has started, if the counting button 171 is operated again after the automatic counting has started, the automatic counting will end. good too. That is, when the medal count control unit 350 detects the rising edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When the automatic counting ends, the notification of the automatic counting state ends.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Further, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when 2.0 seconds have passed and the first counting timing has arrived, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started. Note that the counting sound may be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. Although the predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the sound volume as time elapses, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are continuously output, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also continuously output, and the third counting sound is output. The sound and the next output fourth counting sound are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, timbre, etc. may be changed. That is, it is sufficient that the counting sound changes stepwise. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Alternatively, only the tone color may change at predetermined time intervals without increasing the volume at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is composed only of instrumental sound A, the second counting sound is composed of multiple sounds in which instrumental sound A is added to instrumental sound B, and the third counting sound is composed of instrumental sound A and instrumental sound A. A sound composed of a plurality of sounds obtained by adding a musical instrument sound B to a musical instrument sound C is assumed. It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, it takes about 50 seconds to count 5,000 cards obtained through a game at once. If the counting sound continues to be output during this period, it may feel offensive and may be disliked by the adjacent players. As countermeasures for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time elapses, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and then silenced (volume 0). Alternatively, the volume of the counting sound may decrease as time elapses, and the constant sound (volume 1) may be set after the counting sound is output for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine equipped with a function that allows the player to perform various customizations, the type and volume of the counting sound, the method of change (for example, whether to increase or decrease the volume, etc.), etc. The player may be allowed to make a selection. By doing so, it is also possible to increase interest in counting.

In addition to the sound, a lamp may emit light, an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp and the image may be changed step by step.

FIG. 140 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-press operation, has elapsed after the start of operation of the count button 171 .

In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the operation of the count button 171 is started, and power is cut off before the count long-press flag described with reference to FIG. 107 (or FIGS. 125 and 126) is set to ON. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. When the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge after the power is restored, the medal count control section 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and 0.5 seconds has passed since the power was restored. It is determined whether or not the counting button 171 remains operated until the time elapses. Here, if the count button 171 continues to be operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON. counted.

If the long press is performed after the power is restored, the long press may be notified. The long-press informing is started from the time when the long-press is continued when the first counting timing comes after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored. This means that if the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed, the long press is not performed, and the count is made before the first count timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed. When the button 171 is released, none of the cards are counted. Pressing notification is started.

Note that if the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet is counted, but it may be an erroneous operation. Therefore, if the operation of the count button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be treated as an erroneous operation and not counted. FIG. 140(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the count button 171 is determined by detecting only the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171. FIG.

According to the example shown in FIG. 140(b), since the count button 171 is still being operated during the power failure, the rising edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is operated, the long-press determination is not performed, and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 140(a), since the long-press determination is performed depending on whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, even if the up edge is not detected, Long press judgment is executed.

141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 141(a), the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has elapsed after the operation of the count button 171 was started. , then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, a long press operation is performed for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the counting button 171 is operated for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the counting button 171 is operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long-press flag is set to ON, assuming that the count has been held.

In the modification shown in FIG. 141(b) as well, after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-press operation, has passed. Power is restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 141(b), standby processing is provided for a certain period of time (in this example, a standby time of 2 seconds) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until the appropriate timing for performing the counting processing. After the standby time has passed, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 141(a). That is, when the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171, the long-pressing operation is determined for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the operation of the counting button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the waiting time has elapsed, the counting button is held for 0.5 seconds. Assuming that 171 has been operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

142 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 142(a), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), the medal number control unit 350 detects the ON signal without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If the ON signal is detected, the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that the power supply has been continuously set, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for when the power is turned on to the count long press timer whose initial value is set to 500 ms in step S4206 in FIG. In this way, for a long-pressing operation immediately after turning on the power, the counting long-pressing flag is set to ON when a long operation is performed, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is continuously operated, 50 pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 142(b), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operation ends when the counting button 171 is released while the power is off. Therefore, when power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected. Then, in this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in accordance with power-on. This timer counts a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Also, the timer set value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer set value dedicated to power-on in the third modification (for example, 2 seconds). If the operation of the count button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to power-on is counting time, and the operation of the count button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the count long-press flag is set to ON. be. That is, while the timer is counting time, at least one of the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 and the ON signal is detected, and the ON signal is still detected after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long-press flag is set to ON. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is continuously operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display, explained with reference to FIG. 129(b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG.

As shown at the top of FIG. 143(a), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "100". When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms in the display device display process shown in FIG. FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which "1" is subtracted from "99"→"98"→"97"→"96"→"95"→"94".

When 50 sheets are counted by long-pressing the count button 171, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×50=approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by “1” at intervals of approximately 4 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be subtracted is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to subtract 50 images.

FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. As shown in FIG.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 143(b). When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms as in the change display at the time of subtraction. FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which "1" is added step by step as "101"→"102"→"103"→"104"→"105"→"106".

When 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" is displayed at intervals of about 4 ms. In order to perform the change display (addition and subtraction) step by step, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to add 65 images.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. Since the player may not notice the change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying that the display content has changed.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(a). In the example here, all the digits are used to display the change, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle of the display, all segments of all five digits are illuminated (display of "88888") and all segments of all five digits are extinguished. The display (display of "00000") is switched and displayed every 8 ms in this example. Eventually, after 250 ms have passed in this example, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85". Since all the digits are used to perform the change display, it is possible to check whether or not there is a failure in which the segments of all the digits of the game medal number display device 170 do not display. If it can be recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change display.

Although all the digits are used in the change display here, only a part of the digits may be used in order to reduce the processing load and the data volume. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one-digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. Not including the rightmost digit when not using all digits may give the impression that the rightmost digit is broken, so it is meant to indicate that there is no failure. Include the rightmost single digit.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(b). Also in this example, the number "100" changes to the number "85". That is, it changes from a three-digit number to a two-digit number. Therefore, a change display using segments of three digits is performed. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, and the segments appear to go around. According to this changing display, it is possible to give an impression that the number changes starting from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms have passed since the start of the change display, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85".

If a change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the number changes with "85" as the end point.

As described above, while sandwiching the two types of change display described with reference to FIG. 144, a display that changes in steps of a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value may be performed. Specifically, when the value of "100" finally changes to "60" (target value), "100" → display of change → "80" → display of change → display of "60" Become. Furthermore, when a full-color 7-segment LED display device is used as the game medal number display device 170, the light emission color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 not only by the game medal number display device 170 but also by the effect image display device 157. FIG.

The medal count control section 350 transmits a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medal count display numbers shown in FIG. 78) to the game control section 302 as a medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including information indicating the number of game medals in the security command. Security commands are sent to the first sub-controller 400 at intervals of 100ms. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400 and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the “number of game medals”. In this example, the “number of game medals” is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157 .

In this example, the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 displays the number as it is according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at intervals of 100 ms. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 145 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. In addition, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and 50 sheets are counted. The medal number control section 350 starts executing the display device display process shown in FIG. 121, and the game medal number display device 170 starts a changing display that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In FIG. 145, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that seven segments are all lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to an afterimage. On the game medal number display device 170, a changing display is performed by subtracting "1" for about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 medals are counted, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is issued during the security command transmission period (100 ms). Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the security command is received by the first sub-controller 400 after about 20 ms have passed since 50 sheets have been counted, and display processing is executed. The display processing here is frame replacement processing for replacing an image displaying "100" with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the effect image display device 157 will display the number “50” before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 145 described above, the sub-control section (400, 500) receiving the information on the "number of game medals" does not change the display, and the main control section 300 that outputs the information does not display the change. Change display. By doing this, the numerical value “50” finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be grasped from the display on the effect image display device 157, and “50” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display has been completed at the time point.

146 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 146, even the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is changed by subtracting "1". Moreover, the changing display takes longer than the changing display in the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 is performed in 280 ms. This time of 280 ms indicates that 50 tokens are lent out by operating the lending button 707, and 15 tokens (equivalent to the maximum number of tokens to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) required for addition change display and less than 300 ms, which is the period of counting timing.

A player usually looks at the effect image display device 157 in many cases, and does not often look at the game medal number display device 170 . As described above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal counts", and that the counting button 171 is operated more frequently. For that purpose, it is necessary to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals". The reason why the effect image display device 157 also displays the "number of game medals" is to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. tend to Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display of the number of game medals on the game medal display device 170, the player will be able to It can be expected that the player will pay attention to the game medal number display device 170 as well. If the game medal number display device 170 is seen, the effect display is not displayed on the game medal number display device 170, so that the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently.

In addition, in the change display in the effect image display device 157, by displaying not only the changing character display but also the animation display indicating that the change is in progress, attention is likely to be drawn to the "number of game medals", and the number is counted here as well. It can be expected that the button 171 will be operated more frequently. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, the change display can be made suitable for the period of the change display. Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same mode as the change display by the game medal number display device 170 . It is easy to recognize that the change display is being performed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG.

In another example shown in FIG. 147, the game medal number display device 170 does not perform the changing display, and only the display of the "game medal number" in the effect image display device 157 performs the changing display. That is, in this example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 121 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the game medal number display device 170 immediately displays the number "50". On the other hand, even if the security command is received, the effect image display device 157 does not immediately perform display according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. A changing display is performed.

In this example as well, similarly to the modified example shown in FIG. 146, it takes more time to display the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 than on the display device 170 of the number of game medals. It can be expected that the game medal number display device 170, which is displayed quickly, will also be taken into consideration. By having the player look at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently. In addition, in the medal number control section 350, the amount of data for display of changes is reduced, and the processing load is reduced.

FIG. 148(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold.

In FIG. 148(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Below that, the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store up to 16383 “game medal counts”. That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of stored coins.

In a state in which the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16373, 15 coins corresponding to the maximum number of payouts (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the regulations) are paid out. The payout number of 15 is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 . When the number of payouts of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of stored medals and exceeds the threshold value for payout in step S4B03 of FIG. Therefore, the payout response command includes “abnormality” and is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302 . If the payout response command includes "abnormal", the game control unit 302 transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 89). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this command, an upper limit exceeded error notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), on the effect image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, as the upper limit exceeded error notification, the payout threshold is exceeded and the counting is performed so as to overlap the game background display. A character display prompting the operation of the button 171 is displayed. That is, even during the game, the upper limit exceeded error notification is executed.

As the upper limit exceeded error notification, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on.

FIG. 148(b) is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification.

Blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as the upper limit exceeded error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 148(b), the character display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including “normal” from the medal count control unit 350, it transmits a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 89). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), when the payout command is received while the upper limit exceeded error notification is being executed, execution of the upper limit exceeded error notification is terminated. It should be noted that if there is an operation to the count button 171, regardless of the number of game medals, the upper limit exceeding error notification may be ended. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be terminated early.

In addition, information representing the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 . When the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" is the number of payout threshold values (16383 medals), the secondary control unit (400, 500) may perform upper limit reaching error notification. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a character display that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the count button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information indicating the number of game medals is less than the payout threshold value (16383 medals). Incidentally, if there is an operation to the counting button 171, the upper limit reaching error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be terminated early.

Other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added are the case of settlement and the case of lending from the lending machine 700. FIG. In the present embodiment, reaching the upper limit is not determined for settlement, but reaching the upper limit may be determined as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored sheets and the settlement exceeds the settlement threshold, the settlement response command includes "abnormality", and the medal number control unit 350 sends the game control unit 302 to be sent. Then, the game control unit 302 also transmits an error generation command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that an error of exceeding the upper limit of the number of displayed game medals has occurred, even when "abnormality" is included in the settlement response command. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), an upper limit exceeding error is reported. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number (for example, 15,000) than the maximum number of stored tokens. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 in FIG. 103 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. A notice of an error in lending exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700 . However, the effect image display device 157 is transmitted by transmitting the occurrence of the upper limit lending error from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 and further from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. , a speaker 272, a lamp, or the like on the slot machine 100 side.

FIG. 149(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the second payout threshold.

Also in FIG. 149(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown below.

A command including the display number of game medals (the number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 is set with a second payout threshold (for example, 15000) that is less than the maximum number of coins stored in the RAM 358 of 16383 (payout threshold). In the game control section 302, when the number of displayed game medals sent as a command is equal to or greater than the second threshold value for payout, an error nearing the upper limit of displayed number of game medals occurs in the first sub-control section 400. Send an error generation command indicating that On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, the upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 149(a), the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed has a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 as an upper limit imminent notification so as to overlap the game background display. is displayed. That is, in this example as well, the approaching upper limit notification is executed during the game. FIG. 148(a) shows the effect image display device 157 in which the display of the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the display of the upper limit exceeding error notification.

In addition, as an upper limit imminent notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. It should be noted that the approaching upper limit notification is continued until the upper limit exceeding error notification is started after the approaching upper limit notification is started. The notification may be performed only for a part of the time. For example, the notification is performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceeding error notification is performed during one game. For example, when it is known that the privilege period of the AT game or the like is short even when the upper limit imminent notification is started, it is possible to easily prioritize the remaining AT game or the like. Furthermore, when the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 149(b) is a diagram showing another example of an approaching upper limit notification.

The effect image display device 157 may perform flashing display even when the upper limit is approaching. In the example shown in FIG. 149(b), the character display of the upper limit imminent notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit imminent notification is also displayed so as to overlap the game background display during the game, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command including the displayed number of game medals less than the second threshold value for payout from the medal number control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error indicating that the number of displayed game medals is approaching. Send an error release command indicating that the error has been released. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), execution of the upper limit approaching notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Also, the second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the information representing the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or larger than the second threshold for payout, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side may perform the notification that the upper limit is approaching. Then, this upper limit imminent notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "game medal count" becomes the number of coins less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control section 350 . In this case, the number-of-games medal control unit 350 determines whether or not the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout. A notification command is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. By doing so, the sub-controller (400, 500) side can also perform the upper limit imminent notification. And when it becomes less than the 2nd threshold value for payout, the notification end command is transmitted through the route of the number-of-medals control unit 350→game control unit 302→sub control unit (400, 500). It is preferable that the blinking period of the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the near-upper limit notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking period is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. If the near-upper-limit notification is a blinking display, the upper-limit-exceeding error notification may be displayed at all times. It becomes possible to easily recognize the degree of urgency of the notification.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 150(a), an upper limit approaching notification is displayed overlapping the game background display. In addition, the display of the notification that the upper limit is approaching may be a constant display, but is a flashing display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit approaching notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302 transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 an error generation command indicating that a door opening error has occurred. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), error notification is performed based on this error occurrence command. With the front door 102 open, the possibility of fraud (so-called fraud) is increased, so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is a notification with higher urgency than the notification prompting the counting. Note that the operation of the count button 171 is accepted even when the front door 102 is open. On the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 150(a), an error notification display of a door opening error is displayed overlapping the game background display. The display of the error annunciation of the door opening error (hereinafter referred to as the door opening error display) is a text display of "the door is open" and is always displayed. This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the display of the approaching upper limit notification, but it may be displayed on a layer before the display of the approaching upper limit notification so that it overlaps the display of the approaching upper limit notification. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on the layer behind the blinking upper limit notification, and the always displayed door open error display overlaps the blinking upper limit approaching notification display. You may do so.

FIG. 150(b) shows that the character display of the upper limit approaching notification is displayed every second in response to the door open error display which is always displayed. On the right side of FIG. 150(b), the character display of the warning that the upper limit is approaching disappears due to blinking display, and the door open error display of the remaining constant display is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, it is easy to see the highly urgent door open error display. Also, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but does not output a notification sound for an approaching upper limit notification.

Although the errors are not as urgent as the door open error, "Please stop the rotating reel", "A communication error has occurred, which is suspected of disconnection of wiring, disconnection of wiring, or power failure of the rental machine 700". ” may be displayed to request improvement, and together with these displays, a notification prompting counting may also be performed.

FIG. 151(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, a bet is made during the period from when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped if there is no payout, and after the completion of the payout if there is a payout, until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. If no operation has been performed, the state shifts to the demonstration state (demonstrating). Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the display shifts to the demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), during a game (during a bet, during 110 to 112 rotations of the reels, or during a payout), character display of the upper limit imminent notification is started, and a transition is made to the demonstration without the counting button 171 being operated. . In the performance image display device 157, the game background display was displayed during the game, but is switched to the demonstration display during the demonstration. The demo display is a display that introduces stories and characters. Even if the game moves to the middle of the demo, the character display of the approaching upper limit information is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold. Players are more likely to leave from now on if they transition during the demo. By encouraging the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from taking out only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the slot machine 100 while leaving game medals. The blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be continued to ensure the visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be displayed at all times to ensure the visibility of the approaching upper limit notification.

FIG. 151(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 151(b) displays a demonstration display. The notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demonstration display. In this case, since the operation of the count button 171 is desired to be performed preferentially, the notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size. In addition, below that, a caution display is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away from the desk, saying, "Be careful not to forget to remove the card or have it stolen." Also, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300" exceeding the second payout threshold is displayed. In addition, "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 151(a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to less than the second payout threshold. Then, the notification prompting the counting disappears (becomes hidden), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. It should be noted that the display of "the number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the effect image display device 157 has decreased to "14950".

FIG. 152(a) is a diagram showing a notification example when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number.

In FIG. 152(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X number of coins corresponds to a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value. On the effect image display device 157, a notification prompting counting is displayed because the "number of game medals" has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting the counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Here, the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" is less than the prescribed number, the notification to prompt the counting is continued. That is, the notification prompting the counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50×100 for two times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure represents the period during which the notification prompting the counting such as "Please operate the counting button" is performed.

If you set the specification to start notification when the specified number is reached and immediately end the notification when the specified number is reached, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, and in this example, the specified number to start notification Continue reporting until the number is less than . By doing so, it is possible to reduce repetition of notification and counting operations. It should be noted that the notification prompting the counting may be performed within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. They can be encouraged to count large numbers.

The prescribed number may be a settlement threshold, a lending threshold, or any other threshold.

In addition, when the "number of game medals" falls below the prescribed number due to a betting operation, the number of "game medals" is reduced by the predetermined number, although the maximum number of medals is reduced by three in the first place. The notification prompting the count may be continued regardless of the value.

FIG. 152(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15000 in this example), a notification prompting counting is started. The notification prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting the counting is started, the player continues the game without operating the counting button 171. - 特許庁As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout, a notification prompting the counting is performed once in a plurality of games (four games in this example). Therefore, the notification prompting the counting is not performed for three games after the notification prompting the counting is performed. During the three games in which the notification prompting the counting is not performed, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easy to see, and the interest in the game may be improved. It should be noted that when the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold, the notification prompting the counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during three games in which the count prompting notification is not performed, the count prompting notification will not be performed until the next payout second threshold value is exceeded. can't break On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the game in which the notification prompting counting is being performed, the notification prompting counting that has been performed until then disappears (is hidden). ).

Next, the notification regarding counting will be further described.

FIG. 153(a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. 153 ((a) to (c)) show the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358. As shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the counting is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 1000 and prompts the user to count. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time, or continue to be displayed until the "number of game medals" changes next time (same hereafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 2000 and prompts the user to count. Furthermore, when the “number of game medals” exceeds 3000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 3000 and prompts the user to count. After that, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches 15,000, which is the second payout threshold, the display prompting the counting is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 as shown in FIG. 149(a). will be displayed. When the number of medals reaches 15,000, the message "15,000 or more" and the display prompting the count may be displayed continuously, or the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold. If it is equal to or less than the payout threshold, the real value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "15015 medals" is displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the player can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs in the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, the number of lost medals can be easily grasped. In addition, a display prompting for counting may be performed according to the elapsed time after starting a privilege game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a privilege game such as an AT game, a display prompting counting is performed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting is performed when 20 minutes have passed, and a count is performed when 30 minutes have passed is displayed. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 153(b) is a diagram showing an example when the count button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the state advantageous to the player is the AT state. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to the payout. During the AT state game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) that suggests or indicates that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 during the AT state, as in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. is displayed. In this example, the count button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

Here, the state advantageous to the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, and may be in a bonus (RB, BB) operating state or in an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase, and it can be said that the total number of game medals can be counted (output to the lending machine 700). However, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) in the next game will also be counted, and the next game cannot be played unless the tokens are borrowed from the lending machine 700. end up In addition, even if the game is in an advantageous state, it happens that the "number of game medals" is consumed more than the payout. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, a notification is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 153(b) is in a state where the "number of game medals" has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state. Please proceed with the game", a notification (counting end induction notification) is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. In other words, before the counting of all game medals is completed, the counting end guidance notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is good to leave the game value" or a notification such as "If all are counted, the game cannot be played" may be used. In other words, the defect in the case where all game medals have been counted may be notified before all the game medals are counted.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 153(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, the player sees the notification that it is better to leave a few "number of game medals", releases the count button 171, and counting ends when 50 is left as the "number of game medals". are doing.

FIG. 153(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player.

The state disadvantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game is played repeatedly without lending. For example, a normal state can be mentioned. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 153(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or indicates the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(c), the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued in a state where the "number of game medals" is 1000, and the "number of game medals" reaches a certain value ("100" in this example). exceeding and declining. If the player is in a disadvantageous state, the possibility of the player continuing the game after counting is finished is low. In this example, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes zero. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "please stop counting".

FIG. 154(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 153(b). In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 153(b) will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 154(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued, the counting is once terminated. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 154(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "counting is finished". ing. A new operation of the counting button 171 is required to restart the counting that has once been forcibly terminated.

FIG. 154(b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has been forcibly terminated once is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 154(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154(a). Since it has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting is forced to end once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop the game even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, counting by "50" by long-pressing the count button 171 is not effective, and even if the long-pressing operation is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, every time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" is decreased by "1". This is because, for the same reason as described above, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals in the next game (for example, 3) is also counted. Since the next game cannot be played, only "1" is counted in order to make it difficult for the number of game medals to reach 0.

Eventually, when the number of game medals becomes 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "counting finished".

It should be noted that when the player long presses the counting button 171 again, counting by "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 154(c) is an example of the modified example described with reference to FIGS. In the modified example, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, similarly to the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "Please stop counting".

However, even in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue playing the game, the same processing as in a state that is advantageous to the player (Fig. 154(a) and The process shown in FIG. 153(b) or the process shown in FIG. 153(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 155 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. If the VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the power of the lending machine 700 is not turned on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also conceivable that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control section 302 by means of a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 78 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives the VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. I can't proceed. For this reason, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not valid, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not valid. That is, some of the game progress operations, which are of a plurality of types, are invalidated. In this embodiment, some of the operations are intended for operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal is turned off after the first half of the operation starts the game (reel rotation is started), the second half of the operation (operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) is valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it can be advanced. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes invalid while the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is being waited for, the operation is enabled and it is necessary to wait for the timing from scratch, which may give a troublesome impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though the counting is not possible, if the operation of the game progress operation until it is determined by lottery as to whether the internal winning is appropriate or not is enabled, for example, a result advantageous to the player can be obtained, resulting in a sudden and grand event. When the performance is started, there is a possibility that the player's desire to proceed with the game is heightened. As a result, although there was a possibility of delay in taking countermeasures when the VL signal is turned off, the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 may be disabled. It is possible to quickly inform the player that the VL signal has turned off. Even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not handled as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is made. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error cancellation operation is required, but if the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side is suspected, so an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). don't even ask. It should be noted that, as in the following example, a configuration may be employed in which an error is notified while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 155(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. there is Below that, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, the state of the VL signal is shown below it.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), when the VL signal is on, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Also, an error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification display. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 155(a), a character display such as "Communication with rental machine not established" is displayed. As the error notification, it may be notified that the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine is not established" may be displayed.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. , in the modified examples described below, the correspondence differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are in a state ( If the VL signal is turned off in the state of, for example, 980 sheets as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is treated as an invalid operation. A small number of "game medals" means that the player can end the game at any time. encourage repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 155(b) shows a first modified example in which the "number of game medals" is 15550, which is 15000 or more, which is the second payout threshold.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the next game insertion operation (operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132) is disabled, and the opportunity to operate the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are eliminated.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 155(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game can be played. Until that happens, we don't stop the progress of the game so that the players can enjoy it. Further, the continuation of the game even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and the game is played in this state. There is a high possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the game is stopped.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 155(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off. is displayed.

FIG. 156 shows a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold.

The state shown in FIG. 156(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14000, which is less than a certain threshold value (15000 which is the second payout threshold value in this example as well). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification.

The state shown in FIG. 156(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value (second payout threshold value). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are disabled. That is, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Also, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

The second modification shown in FIG. 156 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small may mean that the game has just started, and the progress of the game that has just started is not hindered. There is an aim. In addition, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear even if any trouble occurs in the slot machine 100, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will increase. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value (second payout threshold value), the progress of the game is stopped, and early repair by the clerk is urged. In addition, the fact that the number of "game medals" is large means that the player can perform the counting operation at any time, so the player should be made aware early that the communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. , with the aim of encouraging early repair by the store clerk.

From the above explanation, the method of responding to the turn-off of the VL signal also changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the state is favorable or unfavorable to the player. It should be noted that the term "advantageous state" for the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and is referred to as a disadvantageous state. is a state (for example, normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is disadvantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations are treated as valid operations. Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold in a state advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some of the operations may be disabled.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state disadvantageous to the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, at least one of a plurality of types of game progress operations is performed in order to quickly make the player aware that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established and to prompt the clerk to repair it early. operation is disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is advantageous to the player, there is a possibility that the state has just become advantageous. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, the player is notified early before the "number of game medals" exceeds the certain threshold value, and the clerk In order to promote early restoration by , when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled.

FIG. 157 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not handled as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error release operation is requested for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(a), it is treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error cancellation operation for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) is also requested. It is highly possible that the VL signal is turned off because the power supply of the renting machine 700 is not turned on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the renting machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) performs an error cancellation operation, there is a high possibility that the error will occur again. However, by making an error, the clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700 .

The example shown in FIG. 157(b) is an example in which the game can proceed until the counting button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 157(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the rented machine 700 is not established, and the rented machine 700 can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If the lending machine 700 issues an error notification immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called even if the slot machine 100 does not immediately issue an error notification. Further, since communication with the rented machine 700 has not been established, the counting notification may not be sent to the rented machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing so, the slot machine 100 side can perform notification at the minimum opportunity, and by suppressing excessive notification, the player can comfortably proceed with the game.

Note that after detecting the operation of the count button 171, the slot machine 100 side continues to notify until the VL signal is turned back on.

[Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state advantageous to the player such as the AT state or the bonus state is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In such a state, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count less than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game If the number of game medals is counted while the AT game is being played, the number of game medals will continue to increase. Therefore, when an effect accompanying counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the execution period of this effect becomes long, and for example, it is difficult to perform an effect with an ending scene in anticipation of the end of the counting. Also, when a counting effect (FIG. 130, etc.) is executed in relation to the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, and the interest in the game decreases. On the other hand, by designing so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such a problem can be made less likely to occur. can be done. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count more than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game When the counting is performed while the number of game medals is counted, the number of game medals continues to decrease during the AT game. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the count button 171 is kept pressed, it is possible to expect a decrease of about 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when the production accompanying the counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the prospect of the end of the execution period of this production can be obtained. It should be noted that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases) according to the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the counting effect is not limited to the configuration in which the counting effect is ended in accordance with the counting process, and the counting effect may be ended even when the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is uniformly executed in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, the interest in the game will decrease due to the counting effect being executed for a long time, and the counting effect will interfere with other effects. Problems can arise. Such a problem can sometimes be prevented by ending the counting effect even while the counting process is continuing. In addition, as such a configuration, for example, the counting effect is ended depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting effect is ended when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . In addition, when the counting process ends before these conditions for ending the counting effect are satisfied, the counting effect may be terminated or the counting effect may be continued.

Further, the content of the counting effect may be changed according to the number of game medals counted. In this case, the effect content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the effect content may be set based on the cumulative amount of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. can be Further, for example, when the number of game medals counted exceeds a predetermined value, the setting suggesting effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases). After the player has obtained a large number of game medals, the player can perform counting processing and select a game play. It should be noted that, regarding the counting effect corresponding to the number of game medals, if the counting process and the counting effect are terminated in the middle due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk that it will be lost. For this reason, even after the counting effect ends in the middle, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from there, the immediately preceding counting effect It is also possible to restart the count effect that has been lost) from the middle. In addition, the counting effect is continuously executed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is started while the counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect being executed may be continued as it is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the predetermined time may be the same as the determination time of the long press of the counting button 171, for example.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If an effect requiring an operation on the operating means is executed during execution of the counting effect, there is a risk of inducing an erroneous operation. Therefore, during the execution of the counting effect, the effect requiring operation of some operation means may not be executed (or the execution probability may be reduced). In addition, it is also possible to similarly limit effects that are extremely difficult to recognize when executed at the same time as the counting effects. That is, it may be configured to provide an effect that is restricted while the counting effect is being executed. In addition, it does not have to be an effect that requires the operation of the operation means, for example, an effect with a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or an effect that takes a long time to run and the result is not known until the end. may

It should be noted that, for example, when the counting process is started while the side lamps are lighting, which is an effect in an advantageous state, the effect by the side lamps changes to that by the counting effect, and so on. may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, when some kind of effect is started during execution of the counting effect, the counting effect may be replaced by an effect to be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes according to the degree of progress of the game during the execution of the counting process, for example, the character changes (for example, grows) when the game progresses during the execution of the counting process. can be

Further, when the number of game medals becomes 0 and the counting process and the counting effect are completed, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if the number of game medals is newly acquired and the counting process is started, immediately before The finished counting effect may be restarted from the continuation.

Also, during execution of the counting process, at least a part of the game progress operation during execution of the counting process may be restricted such that the next game start operation cannot be performed.

[Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing the count button 171 for a long time, the number of game medals up to 50 can be transferred to the lending machine 700 . FIG. 158(a) shows a change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed long from the state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. The flow until all the number of game medals is transferred to the lending machine 700 and the number of game medals becomes zero is shown.

In the counting process, the current value of the number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting determination. (Fig. 101). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 158(b) shows the change in the number of game medals when 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a). It is In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 remaining game medals. After that, all the remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the game medals become zero.

In the above-described embodiment, as in the example of FIG. 158(b), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is , and the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 158(b)) at the time of starting the counting process does not match the number of game medals (128 in FIG. 158(b)) transferred by the counting process, and the counting process There is a possibility that it will become a work burden when there is a situation to check the data of In such a case, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is not immediately reflected. becomes 0, or the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals becomes 0, thereby completing the counting process that has been continued. For example, when the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, after counting 120 cards stored when the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, 8 cards, which increased during the long pressing of the counting button 171, are counted. do. For example, when the long press of the counting button 171 is released in the middle, 60 sheets out of 120 stored when the long pressing of the counting button 171 is started are counted, and then the long pressing of the counting button 171 is resumed. Sometimes count the 68 memorized. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50→18. In FIG. 158(c), while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), there are 8 payouts. does not reflect this increase (the same flow as in FIG. 158(a)), the increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It is shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 158(c)) at the start of the counting process and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals becomes 0 once (FIG. 158(c) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In addition, in FIG. 158(e), while the 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 cards stored at the start of the game, the 8 cards paid out are counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

It should be noted that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is being continued, the total value of all these may be reflected later, or the counting process may be continued. If there is, it may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes zero.

The display of the game medal number display device 170 in the case of adopting the above configuration may also be displayed in accordance with the change in the game medal number. Further, the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is being continued may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the decrease display of the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is an increase in deviation). FIG. 158(d) shows a flow when adopting a configuration in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) is immediately reflected on the display in contrast to the flow of FIG. 158(c). there is In this configuration, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the displayed number of game medals are in a state of deviation by the amount of the above increase, but they are in a state of matching at the end of the counting process. Even if the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 to end the counting process, the increase is reflected in the number of game medals at that time. The value of the number of game medals on the display becomes the same.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals during the counting process is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 again, the reflected increment can be transferred to the rental machine 700 . Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is being continued. It may be possible to transfer (the counting process continues, FIG. 158(e)).

The increase in the number of game medals may be due to payout or settlement operation, but either one of these may be the object of the configuration described in FIG. 158(c), or both may be the object.

[Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]
In the above-described embodiment, if you wish to change the number of game medals to bet 1 after betting 3 game medals, operate the checkout button 134 to return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals". By operating the bet button 130 for betting one coin again, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. In this case, operation of the settlement button 134 and operation of the bet button 130 are required, but the operation may be performed by operating the bet button 130 once. As an example of such a configuration, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current number of bets is the maximum value, there is a configuration in which the settlement button process (FIG. 85) is executed and then the process for the bet button operation is executed. mentioned. Also, when the bet button 130 is operated with the current bet number at the maximum value, the amount of change when the bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is taken as the settlement number. Along with sending the settlement command (FIG. 80), the value of the current bet may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a portion of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and separate input processing and input commands are not required. These configurations are examples of configurations in which the current bet number is set to the minimum value based on the operation of the operation means capable of setting the minimum bet amount when the current bet number is at the maximum value. Equivalent to.

In addition, when the above configuration is adopted, by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, the current bet number can be changed in the order of 0→1→2→3→1→2 . . . You can change the current bet setting.

If there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and a bet sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For the operation of , the settlement sound and the input sound may be output in succession. However, if two types of sounds are output for one operation, the player may be confused. , the input sound may be output without outputting the settlement sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, a character or the like indicating that the settlement has been made is displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters or the like indicating that the payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the settlement button 134 has been operated instead of the bet button 130 .

[Regarding the production according to the number of game medals]
A configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of the operation of executing different effects according to the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the predetermined number is reached.

First, FIG. 159(a1) shows the state at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 159(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 159(a3) shows the state when medals are won in the AT state, and FIG. 159(a4) shows the state when the AT state ends. In the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the value of "Possessed" in the upper left of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "... GET" section in the upper right of the screen. is displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 159(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the special effect is not executed and the normal effect (FIG. 159(a2)) is executed.

Next, FIGS. 159(b1) to 159(b3) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, from the state in which the normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (FIG. 159 (b1)), the state in which the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number after winning medals ( 159(b2)), and then the state in which the special effect is being executed (FIG. 159(b3)). In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM are different from the normal effect. That is, the effect changes in a state where many game medals have been obtained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the different effects are not limited to the example of the special effects described above, and various effects can be used. This different effect is not limited to a configuration that uses different effects, but for example, while the base effect is being executed, another effect interrupts part of it to create a different effect as a whole. good too. Further, for example, regarding the display of the number of game medals and the number of earned medals, the color of each digit is changed to make it rainbow, or the color of each digit is changed periodically. Numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Also, the state in which the effect is to be changed is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effect is different when the state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to switching the effect immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, as long as the effect to be executed differs depending on whether the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. The effect may be switched at the timing when the number reaches a predetermined number and some condition (for example, the number of games is completed, the switching lottery is won) is satisfied, or whether or not the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. It is good also as a structure with a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting the set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 159(c1), when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest display) is executed at the ending.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above-mentioned special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting a set value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which serves as a trigger for making the , may be provided separately.

In the above example, the number of game medals is used as a determination target for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display. Even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals is used as the determination target, the same effect may be obtained. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of possessed medals, and may be a configuration in which a part thereof (for example, 1000 of the number of possessed medals of 5000) is used. When adopting such a configuration, information about the number of medals possessed may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the host server handles the credit balance, the value of the credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals is used to calculate the above number of medals. may be the same as the configuration using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 or the information about the gaming value managed by the host server may be used as a determination target as to whether or not to execute a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of possessed medals is 5000 or more, a different effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination objects are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are executed in each case. It should be noted that the value of the determination target may not be displayed, but if the value of the determination target is displayed as in the above example, the relationship between the determination target and the effect can be grasped. It becomes easy to play, and it can be expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in the above example, the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals are used as the object for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the number of earned medals in the AT state may be used as the object for determination. FIGS. 160(d1) to (d7) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of won medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this flow, FIGS. 160(d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 159(b1) to (b3). However, in this example, since whether or not to execute the special effect is determined based on the number of medals won, the special effect is not executed at this point unlike in FIGS. 159(b1) to (b3). After that, the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) (Fig. 160(d5)), and then the state becomes a state in which a special effect is being executed (Fig. 160(d6)). In this example as well, the effect changes when the number of medals obtained increases, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which different effects and displays are executed when the number of game medals, the number of possessed medals, and the number of earned medals reaches a predetermined number. The number of medals may be used, and the number of won medals may be used for the execution of a different part of the effect, so that each may be properly used. Further, for example, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, such as the effect using the number of possessed medals and the effect using the number of earned medals being executed in parallel, may be employed. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of won medals may exceed the number of medals possessed, and in such a situation, a different effect is executed. As described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined. [About operation when errors are duplicated]
Operations related to errors will be described below using FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the number of game medals overflows. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the game medal number exceeding the upper limit error and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350) can be moved to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). 161(a1) to (a3), the counting button 171 is operated (FIG. 161(a2)) from the state where there are 1336 game medals (FIG. 161(a1)), and all the game medals are lent out. As a result of transmission to the machine 700, the value of the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (FIG. 161(a3)). .

Further, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit value of the number of game medals, and when winning a combination with a payout, if the total of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit value, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 117). In this overflow state, it can be said that it is a kind of error because it waits for resolution of the overflow state without executing the addition processing by paying out. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 . 161 (b1) to (b4), the state in which the number of game medals is the upper limit value (FIG. 161 (b1)) is changed to an overflow state (FIG. 161 (b2)) by winning a combination with a payout, After that, the count button 171 is pressed and held (Fig. 161 (b3), 50 as the number of game medals is moved to the lending machine 700, and the value of the number of game medals display device 170 is decreased by 1), and the overflow state is canceled (Fig. 161 ( A series of flows up to b4)) are shown. The message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 161(b4) indicates that the overflow state has been resolved, and is deleted after being displayed for several seconds. Also, when the overflow state is resolved, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed long, but if the count button 171 is not pressed long, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly hitting the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171. FIG.

Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, various errors (for example, the error in FIG. 76(b)) that hinder the progress of the game by the game control unit 302 can be detected. Since these errors require countermeasures on the side of the store, the configuration is such that the game cannot be progressed and these errors are notified. 162(c1)-(c3) show a transition from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 162(c1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal count control section (FIG. 162(c2)). 162(c3) shows a series of flows until the error state is resolved by the operation of the reset button R while the side takes measures. In addition, the message "Error E0 resolved" in Fig. 162 (c3) indicates that the error that has occurred (in this example, the medal number control unit disconnection error) has been resolved, and is displayed for several seconds. erased. The reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, an error related to the game control unit 302 that needs to be canceled by the operation of the store (for example, a game sequence error in FIG. game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control section 350 that can be canceled by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal number control error). The medal number control error is an error that does not seriously affect the progress of the game compared to the game control error. Therefore, if these errors occur in duplicate, it is conceivable to preferentially resolve the game control error of high importance. An example of the operation when adopting such a configuration will be described below. In the following explanation, an example of a disconnection error of the medal number control section and an overflow state will be explained, but the error concerning the game control section 302 and the error concerning the medal number control section 350 are not limited to these errors. It can be applied to errors that employ similar clearing methods.

FIG. 163(d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a combination with a payout is won from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 163(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the operation of the count button 171 to cancel the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here, it is assumed that a disconnection error of the medal count control section occurred before this operation (game control error and medal count control error overlap). . FIG. 163(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 163(d2) is cleared and a message indicating that a disconnection error of the medal number control section has occurred is displayed. In the above example, the message indicating the overflow state ((d2) in FIG. 163) is cleared when the medal number controller disconnection error occurs. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred superimposed on the message indicating that the overflow state has occurred, or display the overflow state in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that the medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred. You may make it display the message about both errors, such as displaying the message which shows. Further, when displaying messages regarding both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from the display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where the game control error and the medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is not executed, so the overflow state is not released. Also, at this time, a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the counting button 171 is invalid. In FIG. 163(d4), by operating the counting button 171, in addition to the message shown in FIG. A state is shown in which a message prompting the user to do so is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially process the disconnection error of the medal number control unit.

After that, the store side takes measures and the reset button R is operated to eliminate the error state and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 163(d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the disconnection error of the medal number control section has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 163(d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that of FIG. 163(d2) is displayed. After that, by operating the counting button 171 as described in FIG. 161, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released. FIGS. 163(d7) and 163(d8) show that the count button 171 has been pressed long and the overflow state has been resolved, as in FIGS. 161(b3) and 161(b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is resolved.

It should be noted that, in order to realize the above operation, while the game control error is occurring, the processing corresponding to the operation of the operation means (in the above example, the count button 171) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed. good too. 164(e1) to (e3), the state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 164(e1)) changes to the state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal count control section (FIG. 164(e2)), and this error 164 ( e3)) is shown.

In the above example, the operation means for canceling the game control error and the operation means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such that any error can be canceled by the reset button R. It should be noted that the error canceling operating means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, operating means installed inside the gaming machine). In the case of this configuration, if a game control error occurs while the medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the operation means for error cancellation (the medal number control error is not canceled and the game Control error is preferentially canceled), it is possible to preferentially cancel the game control error of high importance.

[Notification of counting process (1)]
In a state that is advantageous to the player, an effect for livening up the game may be executed. A case of lowering (or muting) the noise is provided. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the effect, and to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the count notification by the change of this effect sound volume is called the count notification A. FIG. Here, the configuration for changing the volume of the effect by counting processing will be mainly described, but the configuration for changing the effect in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, change in volume, change in sound quality, change in display) A part may be changed, and the color of the lamp and the lighting mode may be changed).

In some cases, a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), and a demonstration effect is executed in a state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state). Then, the effect is continuously executed in a state advantageous to the player. The counting notification A can make the execution of the counting process known even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A on condition that it has stopped. In addition, the counting notification A is provided on the condition that all the reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption) in which the effect volume is lowered (or silenced) even after the time has passed since the last stop operation on the reel is adopted. In this case, the degree of volume reduction may be made different so as to be distinguished from the volume reduction due to the count notification A. Further, when the performance volume reduction due to the passage of time and the execution of the count notification A overlap, the volume reduction due to the count notification A may be prioritized.

On the other hand, when any one of the reels is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification A is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the production of the next game. There is a case where the operation of the operating means is triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A being executed is terminated (for example, the changed sound volume is returned) triggered by an operation on some operation means.

In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of counted sheets (eg, FIG. 130), or the counting sound is varied according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (eg, FIG. 130), but when the counting notification A is executed, a counting sound corresponding to such counting processing may be added. Further, for example, the count notification A is executed only when all the reels are not rotating, while the count sound is always output to the counting process. Alternatively, a counting sound may be output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here is set to 50% volume while the reels are rotating, and set to 100% volume while the reels are stopped. may be added. In addition, not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, counting sound output, count display related to the counting process, and combinations thereof) may be combined with the count notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and counting display is allowed to be executed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels are stopped). (only counting sound is output during reel rotation). As another example, a counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting display is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the end of the game (after the third stop operation, after all the reels are stopped). After), execution is permitted (only counting sound is output during reel rotation).

[Notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of counted pieces (eg, FIG. 130), or the counting sound is varied according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (eg, FIG. 130). , a configuration for outputting a counting sound corresponding to the counting process is mentioned.

In a state advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process). In addition, a case is provided in which the production sound in an advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, there are cases where the effect sound in an advantageous state is maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being diminished. In addition, the player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed by the counting sound. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. Note that the counting notification by the counting sound will be referred to as counting notification B hereinafter.

While the counting notification B has the above effect, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B on condition that it has stopped. In addition, counting notification B is provided on the condition that all the reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the final stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any one of the reels is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the production of the next game. There is a case where the operation of the operating means is triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after some operation means is operated.

In the above description, the case where the count notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed have been described. For example, a different melody, different timbre, number of sounds, volume, etc.) may be substituted for this. That is, the case where the counting sound B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting warning B is not executed is the case where the counting sound of the second mode is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second mode is a type of sound that does not hinder the production of an advantageous state, the counting process is executed without reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to make the player grasp that the game is in progress.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, the counting effect of the first mode is executed, and when the counting sound of the second mode is output, the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , and may be replaced with each other. Since there are various types of effects other than voice, for example, if the second aspect of the counting effect is a type of effect that does not hinder the effect of an advantageous state, the interest in the game is not diminished. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
A specific example of the configuration of the count notification (count notification A, count notification B) described above will be described below with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an operation in the case of setting an output permission period for the sound when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a), and FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b).

Both FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has passed since the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when the betting operation is performed. It is an example of operation. FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) show the period during which this counting sound is permitted and the period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. In the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output except when the counting sound is output.

The example of FIG. 165(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 166(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this case, FIG. 166(a2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (a2) after the start operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 166(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the count button 171 is long-pressed after the third stop operation and before the bet button is operated for the next game. FIG. 165(a) shows the operating period of the counting button 171. FIG. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 165(a) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 166(a3) shows how, at this timing (a3), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed.

The subsequent timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a4), and the AT effect sound continues as it is. there is When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (a5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (a5), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (a6) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the characters "counting" in the frame on the upper left of the screen have been erased.

The subsequent timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operations at the timings (a4) and (a5) correspond to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 165(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 167(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 167(b2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 167(b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the counting button 171 is long-pressed after the first stop operation is performed and immediately after the start operation of the next game. FIG. 165(b) shows the operation period of the counting button 171. FIG. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 165(b) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 167(b2) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b3). When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the long press of the counting button 171 continues. FIG. 167(b4) shows how, at this timing (b4), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed. Note that the counting sound is not permitted at this timing (b4), and the AT effect sound is output. Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b5), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . By operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b6). Further, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 167(b7), and the AT production sound is output. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 167(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b8). Also, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT production sound is being output. Note that the characters "counting" in the upper left frame of the screen have been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operation at the timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

[About the display and effects based on the information from the medal number control section]
In this embodiment, the game medals are displayed in the game control unit 302 by the medal number control state command (see FIGS. 74 and 78) periodically transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 (every 5.9 to 8 ms in FIG. 74). Information such as number can be grasped (Fig. 92). Some of these pieces of information are sent to the first sub-controller 400 by a security command (FIG. 74) sent from the game controller 302 periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 74). The first sub-control unit 400 can perform various displays and effects control based on these pieces of information. Also, the player can grasp these information through these displays and effects.

Here, in the above configuration, the time to establish communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is the time required for communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on. If it is later than the establishment time, the security command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the medal number control state command from the medal number control unit 350 has not yet arrived at the game control unit 302. will be sent. Since the security command transmitted at this time does not reflect the information of the medal number control section 350, if various displays and effect control are performed based on the information included in this security command, it will differ from the actual state. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, the security command may be transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after the communication between the game control section 302 and the medal count control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the security command for the first time after the power is turned on after receiving the medal count control state command. Also, the security command may be transmitted after providing a sufficient waiting time.

In addition, until the communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is established, even if the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command, it may not execute processing based on the security command. For example, even if the first sub-controller 400 ignores security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or ignores security commands received until a certain standby time elapses, good.

Information indicating the communication state between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the medal number control state command (the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating normal communication is included in the security command and transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and effect control on the condition that this information is included. It may be made possible. With this configuration, it is possible not to give the player information different from the actual state.

Here, a supplementary description of the operation from the transmission of the security command to the transmission of the next security command will be provided. For example, if information such as the number of game medals changes between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and effect control. put away. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in accordance with the control related to the game (Fig. 74). By performing various displays and effects control, the latest information can be reflected.

<others>
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by: Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (eg, 1 bet button 130) and a second input operation means (eg, MAX bet button 132) different from the first input operation means,
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first insertion operation means has been operated, the gaming value number control means outputs the first insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested insertion number of one sheet) as the insertion operation information. send to
Second input operation information different from the first input operation information (for example, when the requested number of input sheets is 3 input command) to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the number of requested insertions of one) is performed as the game value update process,
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, the game value update process is a second game value update process different from the first game value update process (e.g. subtraction),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for controlling effects performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the reception of the response information within a predetermined period of time after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the effect control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 84 ),
Means for outputting the predetermined game information to the effect control means even when the response information is not received within the predetermined period from the transmission of the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 84, if the response command is not received, step S1114 is executed assuming that the response command is abnormal),
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information ([operation of game control unit 302 by input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] description reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, a slot machine 100), wherein the game machine:
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion Command transmission, etc.)]]), and a gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
Means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is
storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101);
When the input operation information is received while the game value number is stored in the transmission buffer in the counting process and the game value update process is performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means stores a part of the game value number stored in the game value number storage means in the transmission buffer in one counting process, and It is a means for subtracting the part of the game value number (for example, since the maximum value of the number of counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 107), it may be part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above, the game value number control means receives the input operation information during a period from the end of one counting process to the start of the next counting process. If it is, means for transmitting the first response information to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command will be other than the re-request),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when receiving the second response information (for example, No determination in step S1310 of FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit number (for example, determination of No in step S1306 in FIG. 86), and the operation to the input operation means is performed (For example, the response result is abnormal, so step S1113 in FIG. 84 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
Means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
Means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 124, the same value as the requested number of inserted game medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124 , Steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 124 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122),
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is a means for not performing the insertion process (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 122, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means, based on the fact that the maximum number insertion operation means is operated, the maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command to set the maximum number of bets as the requested number), which is the insertion operation information. A means capable of transmitting to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of input requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([deformation for input operation Example] See),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on input limit flag ON),
The requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , variations of FIGS. 122 to 124, steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG.
The requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is not included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value updating process is executed to set the game value number stored in the game value number storage means to 0, and the response information including information indicating the game value number before becoming 0 is executed. to the game control means (for example, variations in FIGS. 122 to 124, determination of No in step S4604 in FIG. 124, determination of Yes in S4621, the number of game medals are all subtracted (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as a subtraction by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the game value number before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inputting the game value of the game value number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a minimum number input operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means, based on the fact that the minimum number insertion operation means is operated, sets the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a required number of 1) as the insertion operation information to the game value means capable of transmitting to the number control means,
The game value number control means is means for deriving the minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs, based on the reception of the minimum number input operation information,
The minimum number input operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 122),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112), the game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 124, the same value as the requested number of inserted game medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintenance) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122),
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is a means for not performing the insertion process (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 122, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 124, the same value as the requested number of inserted game medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintenance) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122),
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is a means for not performing the insertion process (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 122, the insertion request number is not entered),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process will be counted after the next time. Become),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when receiving the settlement operation information during execution of the first counting process, stores the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number storage. Means for summing the number of game values stored in the means and subjecting it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 113),
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process will be counted after the next time. Become),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a gaming table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process will be counted after the next time. Become),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during counting is to be counted next time.) ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the game value number control means stores the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number storage means. means for summing up the game value numbers stored and subjecting them to the second counting process;
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for controlling effects performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 117),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the receipt of the payout information has been completed normally ( For example, step S1607 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during counting is to be counted next time.) ,
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during counting is to be counted next time.) , a gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means to maintain the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value, the game value number control means controls the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4B03 in FIG. 117),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the second value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117),
The second value is a value greater than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 117, step S4107 in FIG. 106),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means has a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device, and the game value control means controls the game value. When the number of game values stored in the storage means does not exceed the first value, the response information is stored in the transmission buffer, and the response information is transmitted along with the transmission of the response information to the external processing device. After the buffer is cleared, it is means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3712 in FIG. 103). judgment of Yes),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706), sending the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device ( For example, a determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706 is not executed), a means for transmitting the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) to the external processing device ([ Refer to lending receipt result response (regular transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device one before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means to maintain the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device characterized by: Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, in FIG. 101). Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value control means controls the external process. While updating the communication number with the device (for example, determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value control means controls the external Without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706 is not executed), the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) A means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, determination of No in step S3712 in FIG. 103, S3714 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device one before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game medium management device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The game value control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game medium management device, the means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103);
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and processes the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the counting promotion state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored after that, the counting is performed. Means that can set the promotion state (for example, FIG. 135 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Determination of No in step S4211 in FIG. 107;
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be sent to the game media management device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms) as the game value number. A game media management device characterized by repeated transmission.

Also,
a gaming table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent and
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 134);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second value may increase in degree according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (Fig. 134).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the counting promotion state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored after that, the counting is performed. Means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase (Fig. 135 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value stored by the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the game value control means controls the game value stored by the game value storage means. is a means for reducing the degree of increase of the second value compared to the case where exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 135 (a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) to the game medium management device, and can set a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, FIG. 125 step S4208),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value as the game value number is sent to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 134);
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent and
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 134);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 126). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing predetermined notification (Fig. 138, Fig. 139)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Equipped with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the automatic counting state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when the power is restored after that, the automatic counting state is set. Means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 137 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored by the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 137(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
A game value storage means (for example, a RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to the game value used in a game; and a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be sent to the game media management device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 126). S4209) can be sent to the game media management device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (for example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 126). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step in FIG. 107). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent and
The game value number control means is in the predetermined operation state before the power failure when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since the power failure occurred and the power is restored thereafter. Means for determining the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the predetermined operation state has been maintained after power is restored regardless of the time (FIG. 140(a));
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step in FIG. 107). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting acceleration state when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since a power failure occurred and then the power was restored. There is (Fig. 140(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Equipped with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A gaming system characterized by: Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. (e.g., FIGS. 143-147),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined period (eg, 300 ms),
The display means is means for performing the change display in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 143 and 144),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
An operation means (for example, a count button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the fact that the operation means is operated,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined cycle,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Determination of No in step S4211 in FIG. 107;
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. (e.g., FIGS. 143-147),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. (e.g., FIGS. 143-147),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 82). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above, an abnormality of the game control means is reported with priority over an abnormality of the game value information control means (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the game control means at a predetermined cycle (for example, one command is transmitted at eight interrupts (0.745 ms×8)),
The game control means is a means for judging abnormal communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91, [Action against error (game control Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [operation against error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 of FIG. 95 and step S4407 of FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 82). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 95),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 82). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 95),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormalities in the game control means are reported with priority over abnormalities in the game value information control means (see [Operations for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91),
Abnormalities in the game control means are reported with priority over the communication abnormalities (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
If the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 of FIG. 95 and step S4407 of FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of disabling the progress of the game when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 in FIG. 89 is No, and the process is repeated. Operation of unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, a host server) and processes the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. means capable of executing the game value update process for subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
When the game value number control means receives the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )] see), a gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
Game value number control means (for example, , medal number control unit 350),
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of causing the effect means to perform a demonstration effect when the game is not being executed,
The predetermined effect is a effect that is performed even when the demonstration effect is being performed (for example, FIG. 151 (a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value control means transmits the game value to the external processing device and the game value update process subtracts the game value based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The amusement machine includes game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that bi-directionally communicates with the game medium management device and performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means; ,
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, a medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An amusement machine equipped with main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) to progress a game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the external processing device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of putting the game into a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 83),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, does not execute error notification for the VL signal abnormality).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The main control means executes the processing for transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process for subtracting the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the game medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is means for performing game value update processing for updating the number of game values related to game values used in games (for example, updating the number of game medals), and the main control means is the game medium management device. is a means capable of deriving the number of the game values lent out based on receiving the lent information from, and performing the game value update process based on the number of lent outs (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, Step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game medium management device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the game medium management device,
The main control means is a means capable of putting the game into a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 83),
A game media management device characterized by:

Also,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A gaming machine comprising main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the external processing device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of putting the game into a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 83),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
counting operation means (eg, counting button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 130) accompanying the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game by the counting process. Small (In the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing different configurations),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect provided with an end condition that is different from the end of the counting process. configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The production control means is means for not executing the specific production during execution of the counting production,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The specific effect is a effect that requires a player's operation,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect whose content changes according to the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
(See the configuration in which the content of the counting effect changes according to the number of game medals counted in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]). there is

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for restarting the immediately preceding counting effect from the middle when the counting process is started again within a predetermined time after the counting effect ends in the middle due to the end of the counting process. is
During the description of the game machine ([Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], even after the counting effect has ended in the middle, the immediately preceding counting effect (counting effect that ended in the middle ) is resumed from the middle)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means continues the counting effect within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and when the counting process is newly started while the counting effect is continuing, the counting effect is executed. is a means of continuing to perform,
During the description of the game machine ([Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the counting effect continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the counting effect being executed is maintained as it is), is described.

Also, a game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information (for example, a settlement command) regarding settlement to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the first information, performs the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then updates the game value with respect to the first information. A means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets to 0 based on the fact that the adjustment operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration that does not wait for a response command to the settlement command (response command not used)) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting second information (for example, an input command) regarding the input to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the second information, and performs the game value update process based on the input request number. A means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on the reception of response information to the second information,
(For the input command, see the configuration using the response command).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process continues, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. , the increased game value is transmitted to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]. See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process is continued, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. after sending the game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum number of counting processing is continued) See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process continues, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at a transmission timing that periodically visits (for example, transmission of the number of game medals by counting processing (count notification ) every 300 ms, FIG. 72),
When the game value number control means terminates the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number at the current transmission timing out of the transmission timings, the game value control means It is means for transmitting the game value number of the increment at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 158(c) and 158(e), after the transmission of 120 game medals at the time of counting processing is completed first, the increment is sent.),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, effect image display device 157, game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process continues, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The display means is means capable of performing subtraction display for subtracting the game value number in accordance with the game value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting the increase when there is an increase in the game value while the counting process continues (FIG. 158(d) ( f)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Regarding the configuration related to the payout and settlement operations during the counting process], either the payout or the settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (eg, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example, bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum bet amount,
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means determines a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. means for transmitting the settlement information including the game value control means to the game value control means;
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277),
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine ((see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation])) characterized by

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (eg, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example, bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum bet amount,
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information,
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The voice output means is means for not outputting the settlement sound when the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the bet amount is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the number of game values,
(Refer to the configuration that determines the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

Also,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]) characterized by the following.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of accumulated game values acquired in the game (for example, the number of owned medals is the accumulated game value acquired in the game),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means executes a first effect when the number of determination objects has not reached a predetermined number, and executes a second effect based on the fact that the number of determination objects has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the determination target at least in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals], the value to be the determination target is displayed. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], (Refer to the configuration in which the production using the number of medals held and the production using the number of medals earned are executed in parallel),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the certain game state, the number of game values acquired in the certain game state may exceed the number contained in the external information ("Player If the counting process is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, the number of medals won may exceed the number of medals you have"),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestive effect according to the determination target ([Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals] "When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, the set value is changed. The suggested display may be executed”),
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the game value number in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possessed" in FIG. 160),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect in accordance with the number of acquired game values in the certain game state,
(In the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], a configuration for determining the number of won medals in the AT state, see FIG. 160) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired game values in the certain game state (for example, the value of "... GET" in FIG. 160),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for updating and displaying both the display of the obtained number and the display of the number of game values when a game value is obtained in the certain game state (for example, FIG. 160 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of executing effects corresponding to the number of game values in the certain game state. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
when the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error is irresolvable;
A gaming machine (see the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication], FIG. 163) characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 161),
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
A gaming machine characterized by the there is

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error becomes the non-resolvable first state. ,
The notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state,
A gaming machine (see the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication], FIG. 163) characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 163 (d4)). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 163 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means for interrupting the second error notification that has been executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see FIGS. 163(d2) and (d3)),
The notification means is means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 163(d4) to (d6)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [Regarding the operation at the time of error duplication], (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
the second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process;
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means.
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 161(b2) to (b4)) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
game control means (e.g., game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means; and storing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game. game value storage means (for example, RAM 358);
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
The sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means may decrease the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped. is a means of
(See the configuration for executing count notification A in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The voice output means, in the first gaming state, when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has passed since all of the rotating reels have been stopped. A means by which the volume of the first effect sound may be reduced,
During the description of the gaming machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. (See configuration for executing count notification A on the condition of ), is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The voice output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The sound output means is means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is reduced.
A game machine characterized by that (see the configuration that terminates the counting notification A being executed in response to an operation on some operating means in the description of [Regarding counting processing notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means;
with
The game control means is a means capable of setting a second game state (for example, normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production,
The effect means is means for not executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The effect means is means capable of executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
During the description of the amusement machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demo effect is executed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description), is described.

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is means for setting a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player, and the sound output means produces a first effect sound (for example, AT state) in the first game state. , AT state production sound) is a means capable of outputting,
The sound output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means is means for maintaining a state in which the first effect sound is being output when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for outputting the second effect sound when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. be,
(See the configuration for executing count notification B in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
(Refer to the configuration in which count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first game state to when the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration that does not execute count notification B after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reel stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139),
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the first mode when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. is sometimes a means of
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the second mode when the counting process is being executed while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. is a means of outputting
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The voice output means outputs the second is a means for outputting the effect sound of in a second mode,
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means for executing a first control related to the game value number based on the reception of the command.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on normal communication between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the effect control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is transmitted at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, various processing commands in FIG. 72) including the information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means in accordance with the progress of the game. is a means to
The effect control means is a means for executing the first control based on the reception of the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by:

Also,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

Also,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

[Other embodiments]
Next, slot machines according to other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 171. FIG.

In the following description, the same configuration as that of the slot machine according to the above embodiment will be omitted, and only the different configuration will be described. In addition, with respect to words and phrases overlapping with other embodiments, the words and phrases of this embodiment have priority, and with respect to descriptions that overlap with drawings other than FIGS. 168 to 171, the descriptions in FIGS.

<Notification of stop instruction>
First, the stop instruction notification will be described. Here, the stop instruction notification is a notification (for example, operation navigation) including a suggestion of a symbol aimed at stopping, and the notification means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment aims at stopping A first operation instruction notification that includes a suggestion of a first symbol (e.g., Seven 1 (blue 7)) and does not include a suggestion of a second symbol (e.g., Seven 2 (red 7)) Then, a second operation instruction notification that includes a suggestion of a second symbol (for example, Seven 2) aimed at stopping, but does not include a suggestion of the first symbol (for example, Seven 1) may run.

<Notification of first stop instruction>
FIG. 168 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 4A, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started by pressing the start lever 135, and in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 by winning the AT lottery in the chance state. , a notification that includes a suggestion of a first symbol (in this example, Seven 1) aimed at stopping, and a first operation that does not include a suggestion of a second symbol (in this example, Seven 2) Instruction notification ID1 is being executed.

In the first operation instruction notification ID1 of this example, the target symbol notification ID1a ( In this example, a display including an image of Seven 1 pattern and the character string "Aim!" A display suggesting that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 139→left stop button 137) is executed.

In addition, the "first operation instruction notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and is a notification including a suggestion of a first symbol aimed at stopping, and a suggestion of a second symbol. Any notification that does not include it is acceptable. For example, it may be a notification that does not include the pressing order notification ID 1b that suggests the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, such as "Aim for Blue 7", "Aim for Seven 1", etc. , or in addition to (or instead of) notification by the display means, notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, "Aim for Blue 7") , output of voice saying "Aim for Seven 1") may be applied.

Also, the condition for starting the notification of the first operation instruction is not limited to this example. (For example, 100 points) may be accumulated.

<First stop instruction notification→first stop mode→execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 168(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a game that executes the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 168(a)), the first symbols (for example, , Seven 1) can be stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), and the informing means executes the first operation instruction in the game It is configured to execute a first notification (for example, first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 168(b-1)) when a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode.

In the state shown in FIG. 168(b-1), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1, aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and presses the middle stop button 138 to the right. The stop button 139 → the left stop button 137 is operated in order, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) (" Since the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" is complete), the first notification RD1 (in this example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is executed. .

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 168(d), it shifts to the AT state and starts the AT game.

In addition, the "first notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of character strings such as "Congratulations on Blue 7" and "Congratulations on AT", In addition to (or instead of) notification by display means, notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, audio output of "Congratulations on Blue 7" and "Congratulations on AT"), upper lamp 142, side Notification by a light-emitting means such as the lamp 144 (for example, red blinking) may be applied.

Further, for example, it may be a display suggesting the number of AT games to be added, such as "+OO G", or a display suggesting the number of ATs to be added, such as "+OO cards".

Also, the game in which the "first notification" is executed is not limited to this example. It may be only, or in addition to (or instead of) the game, any game after the game.

<First stop instruction notification → second stop mode → execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 168(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a game that executes the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 168(a)), the second symbols (for example, , Seven 2) can be stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), and the informing means executes the first operation instruction in the game It is configured to execute a first notification (for example, first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 168(b-2)) when a plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode.

In the state shown in FIG. 168(b-2), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, aims at the Seven 2 symbol, and presses the middle stop button. 138→Right stop button 139→Left stop button 137. The reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (second stop mode) (winning line Since the pattern combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" is complete in L1), the first notification RD1 (in this example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is executed. are doing.

According to this example, both the symbol according to the operation instruction (in this example, Seven 1) and the symbol different from the operation instruction (in this example, Seven 2) can be stopped. In some cases, the player can easily perform the stop operation by aiming at a symbol that is easy to operate.

In addition, since the same notification (first notification) may be made in different stop modes (first and second stop modes), it is possible to surprise the player.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"). In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 168(d), it shifts to the AT state and starts the AT game.

<First stop instruction notification → third stop mode → reel effect in the next game>
The state shown in FIG. 168(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a plurality of reels do not stop in the first stop mode (for example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") (for example, the first stop mode and the second stop mode A stop mode other than the stop mode (for example, a so-called loose eye) is configured so that the plurality of reels may stop in the first stop mode as a reel effect in the next game.

In the state shown in FIG. 168(b-3), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1, aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and moves the middle stop button 138 to the right. The stop button 139→left stop button 137 is stopped in this order (or the player stops the stop buttons 137 to 139 without following the first operation instruction information ID1), but the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. stopped at the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (third stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" was completed on the winning line L1), so FIG. 1), the first notification RD1 shown in (b-2) (in this example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, if the reels are stopped in the third stop mode, which is a mode in which all the reels are stopped without the specific symbols being aligned, at least the first Since the first notification is not executed, the notification can be made without misleading the player, the player will not be misunderstood, and the decline of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 168 (c-1), in the game following the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the reel effect is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135 as a trigger, Stop (temporary stop) in the first stop mode (in this example, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination) as a reel effect, and after executing the first notification RD1, AT game is started do.

According to this example, after the reels are stopped in the stop mode other than the first stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode by the reel effect, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the first stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, which surprises the player. can give

In this example, the third stop mode is a mode in which all the reels are stopped without a specific symbol (in this example, either Seven 1 symbol or Seven 2 symbol). The invention is not limited to this, and may be a mode in which other specific symbols are not aligned and stopped.

Also, the game in which the first notification is not executed is not limited to this example, and for example, it is only a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed and the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the first stop mode. Alternatively, in addition to (or instead of) the game, it may be any game after the game.

<Second stop instruction notification>
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the second operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, the target is to start rotating the reels 110 to 112 with the pressing operation of the start lever 135, and to stop the reels 110 to 112 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with the winning of the bonus lottery in the chance state. Execute the second operation instruction notification ID2 which is a notification including the suggestion of the second symbol (in this example, Seven 2) and does not include the suggestion of the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1) ing.

In the second operation instruction notification ID2 of this example, the target symbol notification ID2a ( In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 2 pattern and the character string "Aim!" A display suggesting that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 139→left stop button 137) is executed.

In addition, the "second operation instruction notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and is a notification including a suggestion of a second symbol aiming to stop, and a suggestion of the first symbol. Any notification that does not include it is acceptable. For example, it may be a notification that does not include the pressing order notification ID2b that suggests the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, such as "Aim for Red 7", "Aim for Seven 2", etc. , or in addition to (or instead of) notification by display means, notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, "Aim for red 7") , output of a voice saying "Aim for Seven 2") may be applied.

Also, the condition for starting the notification of the second operation instruction is not limited to this example. (For example, 100 points) may be accumulated.

<Second stop instruction notification→first stop mode→execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 169(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a game that executes the first operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 169(a)), the first symbols (for example, , Seven 1) can be stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), and the notification means executes the second operation instruction notification. It is configured to execute a second notification (for example, a second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 169(b-1)) when a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode.

In the state shown in FIG. 169 (b-1), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and presses the middle stop button. 138→Right stop button 139→Left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) (winning line Since the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" is complete in L1), the second notification RD2 (in this example, a display including a character string "Bonus Get!" and an effect image) is executed. are doing.

Also, in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed when the bonus lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). In the next game after stopping at symbol combination), as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, in the game or the like that executes the second operation instruction notification ID2 triggered by winning the AT lottery, in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode, the AT game is shifted to. In this case, as the second notification RD2, for example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) may be executed.

Further, the "second notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of character strings such as "Congratulations on Red 7", "Congratulations on bonus", In addition to (or instead of) notification by display means, notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of audio "Congratulations on red 7" and "Congratulations on bonus"), upper lamp 142, side Notification by a light-emitting means such as the lamp 144 (for example, red blinking) may be applied.

In addition, the game to execute the "second notification" is not limited to this example, for example, a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode or the second stop mode It may be only, or in addition to (or instead of) the game, any game after the game.

<Second stop instruction notification → second stop mode → execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 169(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a game that executes the second operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 169(a)), the second symbols (for example, , Seven 2) can be stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), and the informing means executes the second operation instruction in the game It is configured to execute a second notification (for example, a second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 169(b-2)) when a plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode.

In the state shown in FIG. 169 (b-2), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2, aims at the seven 2 symbol, and moves the middle stop button 138 to the right. The stop button 139 → the left stop button 137 is operated in order, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 2 - Seven 2 - Seven 2" (second stop mode) (" Since the pattern combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" has been completed), the second notification RD1 (in this example, a display including a character string "Bonus Get!" and an effect image) is executed. .

According to this example, both the symbol according to the operation instruction (in this example, Seven 1) and the symbol different from the operation instruction (in this example, Seven 2) can be stopped. In some cases, the player can easily perform the stop operation by aiming at a symbol that is easy to operate.

In addition, since the same notification (second notification) may be made in different stop modes (first and second stop modes), it is possible to surprise the player.

Also, in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed when the bonus lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the second stop mode (in this example, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"). In the next game after stopping at symbol combination), as shown in FIG.

<Second stop instruction notification → third stop mode → reel effect in the next game>
The state shown in FIG. 169(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stop mode in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a plurality of reels do not stop in the second stop mode (for example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") (for example, the first stop mode and the second stop mode A stop mode other than the stop mode (for example, a so-called loose eye) is configured so that the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode as a reel effect in the next game.

In the state shown in FIG. 169(b-3), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2, aims at the Seven 2 symbol, and presses the middle stop button 138 → right. The stop button 139→left stop button 137 is operated in order (or the player performs the stop button 137-139 stop operation without following the second operation instruction information ID2), but the reels 110-112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (the third stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" was completed on the winning line L1). 1), the second notification RD2 shown in (b-2) (in this example, a display including a character string "Bonus Get!" and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, if the reels are stopped in the third stop mode, which is a mode in which all the reels are stopped without the specific symbols aligned, at least the first Since the second notification is not executed, the notification can be made without misleading the player, the player will not be misunderstood, and the decline in the player's desire to play can be prevented.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 169 (c-1), in the game following the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed, the reel effect is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135 as a trigger. Stop (temporary stop) in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") as a reel effect, and start the AT game after executing the second notification RD2 are doing.

According to this example, after the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode by the reel effect, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode in a certain game, the second notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, which surprises the player. can give

In addition, the game in which the second notification is not executed is not limited to this example, and is, for example, only a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed and the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode. Alternatively, in addition to (or instead of) the game, it may be any game after the game.

<First stop instruction notification and second stop instruction notification/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and stop operation means (for example, FIG. Stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in ), and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps), and is a means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 168(a)), and the first operation instruction notification aims to stop The first operation instruction notification is a notification that does not include a suggestion of a second symbol (for example, Seven 2), and the first In a game in which one operation instruction notification is executed, all of the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in which the first symbols are stopped. It is possible, and in the game that executes the first operation instruction notification, a second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels (for example, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" symbol combination), the notification means is a means that may execute a second operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 169(a)), and the The second operation instruction notification is notification that includes a suggestion of the second symbol (for example, Seven 2) that is targeted to be stopped, and the second operation instruction notification includes the first symbol (for example, , Seven 1) in a game that does not include the suggestion of Seven 1), and that can be stopped in the first stop mode, in a game that executes the second operation instruction notification , which can be stopped in the second stop mode.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of first and second operation instruction notifications, both the symbols according to the operation instruction and the symbols different from the operation instruction can be stopped. In some cases, the player can easily perform the stop operation by aiming at a symbol that is easy to push.
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (eg, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (eg, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), a stop operation means (eg, a stop button shown in FIG. 137 to 139) and notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps). (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 168(a)). (e.g., Seven 1), and the first operation instruction notification is a notification that does not include a suggestion of a second symbol (e.g., Seven 2), and a predetermined winning combination is won. Then, in a game (hereinafter referred to as "first game") in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, a first stop mode (for example, " symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), and in the first game, the second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels (for example, " symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), and the notification means executes the second operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID 2 shown in FIG. 169(a)) The second operation instruction notification is a notification including a suggestion of the second symbol (for example, seven 2) that is aimed to be stopped, and the second operation instruction notification is a notification that does not include the suggestion of the first symbol (for example, Seven 1), and is a game (hereinafter referred to as "second game") in which a predetermined winning combination is won and the second operation instruction notification is executed. .) can be stopped in the first stop mode, and in the second game, can be stopped in the second stop mode.
The notification means is means for executing a first notification when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the first game, and the notification means is a means for executing the first notification in the first game. means for executing the first notification when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, and the notification means is configured to perform the first notification when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode in the second game; The notification means may be means for executing a second notification, and the notification means may be means for executing the second notification when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode in the second game. .

Further, the notifying means makes a first notification (for example, a first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 168) when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed. wherein the notification means executes the first notification when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, The notification means executes a second notification (for example, a first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 169) when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed. and the notification means may be means for executing the second notification when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed. .

With such a configuration, the same notification may be made in different stopping modes, so that the player can be surprised.

Also, the first notification may be a notification regarding the first symbol (for example, AT game), and the second notification may be a notification regarding the second symbol (for example, bonus game). .

With such a configuration, it may be possible to provide information that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, when the plurality of reels do not stop in the first stop mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode as a reel effect (for example, the reel effect shown in FIG. 169 (c-1)) in the next game. It may stop at

With such a configuration, after the reels are stopped in the stop mode other than the first stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode by the reel performance, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

<Production that continues the first notification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the effect of continuing the first notification will be described.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of continuing the first notification in chronological order. Note that descriptions of the contents described using FIGS. 168 and 169 will be omitted, and only different contents will be described below.

<Effect to continue the first notification/execution of the first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 170(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a game that executes the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 170(a)), the first symbols (for example, , Seven 1) can be stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), and the informing means executes the first operation instruction in the game When a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, the first notification (for example, mission achievement notification MS shown in FIG. 170(b-1)) is executed, and even if the game next to the game is started, It is configured so that one notification may be continuously executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 170(b-1), in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1, aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and moves the middle stop button 138 to the right. The stop button 139 → the left stop button 137 is operated in order, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) (" Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” pattern combination is complete), so the mission achievement notification MS (first notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 1 pattern and the character string “matching achieved!” display) is running.

Here, the mission achievement notification is a notification that is executed when a certain mission is achieved. Since the mission of "let it be done" has been accomplished for the first time, the mission achievement notification MS corresponding to the mission is executed.

Note that the "first notification" according to the present invention may, for example, notify the achievement of another mission, such as winning a mini game, succeeding in a continuous effect, releasing a character, and specifying the number of payouts. It may also be that the number of sheets has been reached in the past.

In addition, it is not limited to the mission achievement notification, for example, it may be a notification that suggests shifting to a specific game (for example, AT game, bonus game, etc.), suggesting the number of AT additional games or the number of additional games It may be a notice to do so.

In addition to (or instead of) notification by display means, notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of sound "mission accomplished"), upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc. Notification by light-emitting means (for example, red flashing) may be applied.

In this example, in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). symbol combination) in the next game after stopping, as shown in FIG. Keep reporting.

According to this example, when the game can be stopped as instructed by the operation, the first notification is continued in the next game, so that the player's sense of accomplishment and expectations can be heightened.

It should be noted that "there is a case where the first notification is continuously executed" according to the present invention is from the game that executes the first operation instruction notification to the next game of the game (in this example, AT game) It is not limited to the case where the first notification is continuously executed without interruption, for example, temporarily after executing the notification for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed The notification may be interrupted, the mission achievement notification MS resumed in the next game (for example, AT game) of the game, and the notification may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the game.

Further, the next game is not limited to the AT game, and may be a normal game, or may be a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, such as a bonus game.

<Effect of continuing the first notification/non-execution of the first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 170(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed.

In the same state, in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, aiming at the Seven 2 symbol, the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left The stop button 137 was operated in order, and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (second stop mode) ("Seven 2-Seven 2" on the winning line L1). -Seven 2" pattern combination is complete), the first notification RD1 (in this example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is executed. Since the mission "Make L1 match the pattern combination of 'Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1'" has not been achieved, the mission achievement notification MS is not executed.

Also, the state shown in FIG. 170(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

In the same state, in the game in which the first operation instruction information ID1 is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction information ID1, aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and moves the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137. (or the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 without following the first operation instruction notification ID1), but the reels 110 to 112 are "Bell-Seven 1-Replay (the third stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" has been completed on the pay line L1), so FIG. (in this example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is not executed. In addition, since the mission of ``aligning the pattern combinations of ``Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1'' on the winning line L1 has not been achieved, the mission achievement notification MS is not executed.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 170 (c-1), in the game following the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, the reel effect is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135 as a trigger, Stop (temporary stop) in the first stop mode (in this example, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination) as a reel effect, and after executing the first notification RD1, AT game is started do.

In this example, the mission achievement notification MS is not executed when the reel effect is executed. It may be regarded as having been achieved, and a mission achievement notification MS may be executed.

<Direction to continue the first notification/summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and stop operation means (for example, FIG. Stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in ), and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps), and is a means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (for example, first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 170(a)), and the first operation instruction notification aims to stop The first operation instruction notification is a notification that does not include a suggestion of a second symbol (for example, Seven 2), and the first In a game in which one operation instruction notification is executed, all of the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in which the first symbols are stopped. It is possible, and in the game that executes the first operation instruction notification, a second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels (for example, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" symbol combination), and the notification means provides a first notification (for example, FIG. , and may continue to execute the first notification even when the game next to the game is started.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when it is possible to stop according to the operation instruction, the first notification is continuously notified even in the next game, so that the player's sense of accomplishment and expectation can be enhanced. can be enhanced.

Further, the first notification may be notification regarding the first symbol.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to provide information that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, the notification means may be means for not executing the first notification when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player so as not to mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding, and prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

Further, when the plurality of reels do not stop in the first stop mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode as a reel effect (for example, the reel effect shown in FIG. 170 (c-1)) in the next game. It may stop at

With such a configuration, after the reels are stopped in the stop mode other than the first stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode by the reel performance, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

<Stopping order different from operation navigation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of stopping in the first stop mode in a stop order different from that of operation navigation will be described.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game, and the game stops in the first stop mode in a different order from that of operation navigation. ) is a state in which the first operation instruction notification is executed in a certain game.

In this example, with the pressing operation of the start lever 135 as a trigger, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started, and with the winning of the AT lottery in the chance state as a trigger, the target is to stop in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A notification that includes the suggestion of the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1), does not include the suggestion of the second symbol (in this example, Seven 2), and the first operation order of the stop operation means (In this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 including the suggestion of "middle→right→left") is executed.

In the first operation instruction notification of this example, the target symbol notification ID1a (the main symbol) prompts the user to stop the stop buttons 137 to 139 so that the Seven 1 symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L1. In the example, a display including an image of Seven 1 pattern and the character string "Aim!" A display suggesting that the stop operation is performed in the order of button 139→left stop button 137) is executed.

<First stop instruction notification → first operation order → first stop mode → execution of first notification>
171 (b-11) to (b-13), the stop operation is performed in the first operation order in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, and the reels 110 to 112 are in the first order. It is in a stopped state in the stop mode.

In the same state, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 suggesting the first operation order (in this example, "middle→right→left") is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1, Aiming at the Seven 1 symbol, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 (first operation order), and the reels 110 to 112 are "seven 1 - seven 1 - seven 1". " symbol combination (first stop mode) ("Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination is completed on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (in this example, " AT get!” and a display including an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). Since it is the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 171(d), it shifts to the AT state and starts the AT game.

<First stop instruction notification → first operation order → second stop mode → execution of first notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 171 (b-21) to (b-23), the stop operation is performed in the first operation order in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, and the reels 110 to 112 are in the second order. It is in a stopped state in the stop mode.

In the same state, in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 suggesting the first operation order (in this example, "middle→right→left") is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1. Aiming at the Seven 2 symbol, stop operations are performed in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 (first operation order), and the reels 110 to 112 are "seven 2 - seven 2 - Since the symbol combination of "Seven 2" (second stop mode) was stopped (the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" was completed on the winning line L1), the first notification RD1 (this example , a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"). Since it is the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 171(d), it shifts to the AT state and starts the AT game.

<First stop instruction notification → second operation order → first stop mode → execution of first notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 171 (b-31) to (b-33), the stop operation is performed in the second operation order in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, and the reels 110 to 112 are the first. It is in a stopped state in the stop mode.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a game for executing the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 171(a)), the first symbols (for example, , Seven 1) can be stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1”), and in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is performed, the first It seems that it is possible to stop in the first stop mode by operating in a second operation order ("right → center → left" in this example) that is different from the operation order ("middle → right → left" in this example). is configured to

In the states shown in FIGS. 171(b-31) to (b-33), the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 suggesting the first operation order (in this example, "middle→right→left") is executed. , the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, but aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and performs a stop operation in the order of the right stop button 139→middle stop button 138→left stop button 137 (second operation order). , and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (the first stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" was are complete), the first notification RD1 (in this example, a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is executed.

In this example, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1 and aims at the Seven 1 symbol and performs the stop operation in the order of right → middle → left (second operation order). During the period until receiving the third stop operation, the first operation instruction notification ID1 is continued without ending. It should be noted that the notification of the first operation instruction may be terminated when the player performs an operation in a second operation order different from the first operation order.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). Since it is the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 171(d), it shifts to the AT state and starts the AT game.

<First stop instruction notification→third operation sequence→second stop mode→execution of first notification>
171 (b-41) to (b-43), the stop operation is performed in the third operation order in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed, and the reels 110 to 112 are placed in the second order. It is in a stopped state in the stop mode.

The slot machine according to this example, in a game that executes the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. → right → left”), and the third operation order (in this example, “left → center → right”) causes the second stop mode (for example, “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2” pattern). combination).

In the same state, in the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 suggesting the first operation order (in this example, "middle→right→left") is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1. Aiming at the Seven 2 symbol, the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop button 137→middle stop button 138→right stop button 139 (third operation order), and the reels 110 to 112 are "seven 2-seven 2". - Since the symbol combination of "Seven 2" (second stop mode) was stopped (the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" was completed on the winning line L1), the first notification RD1 (this example , a display including a character string "AT get!" and an effect image) is executed.

In this example, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1 and aims at the Seven 2 symbol and performs the stop operation in the order of left→middle→right (third operation order). During the period until receiving the third stop operation, the first operation instruction notification ID1 is continued without ending. It should be noted that the first operation instruction notification may be terminated when the player performs an operation in a third operation order different from the first operation order.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"). Since it is the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 171(d), it shifts to the AT state and starts the AT game.

In this example, the small winning combination 6 (Seven 1 pattern matching) and the small winning combination 7 (Seven 2 pattern matching) are shown as an example of one hand, but it may be a replay, in which case the Seven 1 pattern In the game in which the operation instruction notification including the aiming effect is executed, the seven symbols are not aligned, and the breakout stop may be replay.

Also, the pressing order in the game in which the operation instruction notification including the Seven 1 symbol aiming effect is executed is not limited to this example, and may be another pressing order. The Seven 1 symbol aim notification may be performed while performing the operation navigation), or the Seven 1 symbol aim notification may be performed while performing the notification instructing forward pressing (operation navigation).

In addition, in a game in which the Seven 1 symbol aiming notification is performed while the reverse push instruction is given (operation navigation), the Seven 1 symbol matching replay and the Seven 2 symbol matching replay are stopped at the middle or right first stop. The left first stop may not be stopped, and the left first stop may stop the replay.

<Different stop order/summary from operation navigation>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and stop operation means (for example, FIG. Stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in ), and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps), and is a means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 168(a)), and the first operation instruction notification aims to stop The first operation instruction notification is a notification that does not include a suggestion of a second symbol (for example, Seven 2), and the first The one operation instruction notification is notification including suggestion of the first operation order of the stop operation means (for example, "middle → right → left"), and in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the It is possible to stop in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in which the first symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels, and the first operation instruction notification is performed. In the game to be executed, it is possible to stop in a second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped on all of the plurality of reels (for example, a symbol combination of "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2"), and In a game that executes one operation instruction notification, it is possible to stop in the first stop mode by an operation in a second operation order different from the first operation order (for example, "right → middle → left"). , is a game machine characterized by:

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if the order of operations is incorrect, there are cases in which the symbols for notifying the operation instructions can be stopped, so there are cases where it is easy for the player to play.

In addition, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification, the second stop mode is performed by an operation according to a third operation order (for example, "left → right → middle") different from the first operation order. It may be stoppable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and increase the interest of the player in some cases.

Further, when the plurality of reels do not stop in the first stop mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode as a reel effect (for example, the reel effect shown in FIG. 170 (c-1)) in the next game. It may stop at

With such a configuration, after the reels are stopped in the stop mode other than the first stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode by the reel performance, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 symbol display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 liquid crystal display device

Claims (2)

a plurality of reels;
a stop operating means;
a notification means;
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing a first operation instruction notification in some cases,
The first operation instruction notification is a notification including a suggestion of a first symbol aimed at stopping,
The first operation instruction notification is notification that does not include the suggestion of the second pattern,
In a game ( hereinafter referred to as "first game") in which a predetermined winning combination is won and the first operation instruction notification is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first game") , the first symbol is stopped on all of the plurality of reels. Stoppable in a stop mode,
In the first game , all of the plurality of reels can be stopped in a second stop mode in which the second symbols are stopped,
The notification means is means for executing a second operation instruction notification in some cases,
The second operation instruction notification is a notification including a suggestion of the second symbol aiming to stop,
The second operation instruction notification is notification that does not include the suggestion of the first pattern,
In a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won and the second operation instruction notification is executed (hereinafter referred to as "second game") , the game can be stopped in the first stop mode,
In the second game , it can be stopped in the second stop mode,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
The notification means is means for executing a first notification when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode in the first game ,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode in the first game ,
The notification means is means for executing a second notification when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode in the second game ,
The notification means is means for executing the second notification when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode in the second game ,
A playground characterized by:

Images